Baby Lock Unity BLTY Sewing Machine Instruction Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.
com manuals search engine

TRADEMARKS
IMPORTANT:
READ BEFORE DOWNLOADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
By downloading, copying, installing or using the software you agree to this license. If you do not agree
to this license, do not download, install, copy or use the software.
Intel License Agreement For Open Source Computer Vision Library
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation, all rights reserved. Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
• Redistribution’s of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
• Redistribution’s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are
disclaimed. In no event shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,
or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use,
data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict
liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if
advised of the possibility of such damage.
All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice.
SD is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.
Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.
SmartMedia is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
MultiMediaCard (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies. However, the
explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing this machine. Before using this machine, carefully read the “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the correct operation of the various functions.
In addition, after you have finished reading this manual, store it where it can quickly be accessed for
future reference.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Please read these safety instructions before attempting to use the machine.
DANGER - To reduce the risk of electrical shock
1 Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet immediately after using, when cleaning, making any user
servicing adjustments mentioned in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine unattended.
WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electrical shock, or injury to
persons.
2 Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when making any adjustments mentioned in the instruction
manual.
• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the plug and pull
it out of the electrical outlet. Do not pull on the cord.
• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord.
• Always unplug your machine if the power is cut.
3 Electrical Hazards:
• This machine should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do not
connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a
qualified electrician.
• This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only.
4 Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, has been dropped or
damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized retailer for examination,
repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.
• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice anything unusual, such as an odor, heat, discoloration or
deformation, stop using the machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
• When transporting the sewing machine, be sure to carry it by its handle. Lifting the sewing machine by any other
part may damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.
• When lifting the sewing machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you may
injure your back or knees.
B-1
5 Always keep your work area clear:

• Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the sewing machine and
foot control free from the build up of lint, dust, and loose cloth.
• Do not store objects on the foot controller.
• Do not use extension cords. Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
• Never drop or insert foreign objects in any opening.
• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.
• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord or
garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire or an electric shock.
• Do not place this sewing machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the
sewing machine may fall, resulting in injuries.
6 Special care is required when sewing:

• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use bent or damaged needles.
• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.
• Switch the sewing machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off when making any adjustments in the needle
area.
• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as it could cause the needle to break.
• Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and follow careful instruction when free motion stitching so that
you do not deflect the needle and cause it to break.
7 This machine is not a toy:

• Your close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or near children.
• The plastic bag that this sewing machine was supplied in should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed
of. Never allow children to play with the bag due to the danger of suffocation.
• Do not use outdoors.
8 For a longer service life:

• When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine
near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.
• Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage the
case and machine, and should never be used.
• Always consult the operation manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser feet, needle, or
other parts to assure correct installation.
9 For repair or adjustment:

• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by an authorized retailer.
• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of
the operation manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your
local authorized Baby Lock retailer.
Use this machine only for its intended use as described in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as contained in this manual.
Use only the interface cable (USB cable) included with this machine.
Use only a mouse designed specifically for this machine.
Use only the sensor pen included with this machine.
The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
For additional product information and updates, visit our website at www.babylock.com
B-2
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This machine is intended for household use.
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge,
unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised
to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA

AND CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the mark,
rating as marked on plug.
• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.
• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, you should contact your
authorized retailer to obtain the correct lead.
B-3
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Declaration of Conformity (For USA Only)
Responsible Party: Tacony Corporation
1760 Gilsinn Lane,
Fenton, Missouri 63026 USA
declares that the product

Product Name: Baby Lock Sewing Machine
Model Number: BLTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the retailer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The included interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital
device.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tacony Corporation could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
B-4
Laser Notices (For U.S.A. only)

Laser Safety
This sewing machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the
sewing machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
IEC 60825-1 Specification

This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine
contains 7-milliwat, 650-660nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular
divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
FDA Regulations
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured on and after August 2,
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back of the sewing machine
indicates compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
Tacony Corporation
1760 Gilsinn Lane Fenton, Missouri 63026, U.S.A.
This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser

products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50,
dated June 24, 2007.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
B-5
Laser Notices (For countries except U.S.A.)

IEC 60825-1 Specification
This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine
contains 7-milliwat, 650-660nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular
divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
CAUTION
• This sewing machine has a Class 3B Laser Diode in the Laser Unit. The Laser Unit should not be opened
under any circumstances.
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
B-6
OUTSTANDING FEATURES
OUTSTANDING FEATURES
Useful Sensor Function - Variety Sensor Function - Automatic

of Functions Pattern Placement
When sewing, you can easily specify the guideline
marker position, the needle drop position, the
width/LR shift of the stitch and sewing end point,
using the sensor pen.
See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH
SEWING STITCH” on page B-78.
Setting Laser Guideline Marker

When embroidering, you can set the pattern
as a Sewing Position Guide position quickly with the automatic positioning
function using the sensor pen.
The guideline marker shows the sewing position. See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN
You can adjust the sewing position by moving the “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE”
guideline marker while checking the guideline on page B-85.
marker on the fabric. You don’t need to look for
the needle drop point to check the sewing
position. LED Pointer Shows You the
Other various adjustments are available using the Needle Drop Position
guideline marker.
See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH
SEWING STITCH” on page B-78.
Expanding Your Creativity with

Dual Feed Foot
Included Embroidery foot with LED pointer

indicates the needle position with a red LED point.
The LED pointer shows you the location of the
needle penetration so that it is easier to adjust the
embroidery position.
See “Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED
Pointer” on page B-62.
Do you feel like trying a new material, like thin

fabric or nylon fabric?
Included dual feed foot works very effectively
when sewing those difficult materials. This foot
also works effectively when you sew different
types of materials together, like thin fabric with
thick fabric. You can adjust the feed length for the
various fabric types.
See “Using the Dual Feed Foot” on page B-68.
B-7
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE

B Basic operations
After purchasing your machine, be sure to read this section first. This section provides details on the
initial setup procedures as well as descriptions of this machine’s more useful functions.
Chapter 1 Getting Ready Chapter 2 Sensor Functions

To learn the operation of the principal parts and the Try the new function using the supplied sensor pen
screens Page B-72
Page B-20
S Sewing
This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other functions. It
provides details on basic machine sewing in addition to the more expressive features of the machine,
from sewing tubular pieces and buttonholes to sewing the character and decorative stitch patterns and
decorative bobbin work.
Chapter 1 Sewing Basics Chapter 2 Utility Stitches

To learn how to prepare for sewing and basic sewing Pre-programmed with more than 100 frequently used
operations stitches
Page S-2 Page S-20
Chapter 3 Character/Decorative Chapter 4 How to Create Bobbin

Stitches Work (Sewing)
The variety of stitches widen your creativity Wind medium to heavy weight thread on a bobbin for
Page S-76 three-dimensional appearance.
Page S-104
E Embroidering
This section gives instruction to embroider designs with this machine.
Chapter 1, “Embroidery”, provides details on sewing embroidery patterns stored on the machine as well
as patterns that have been imported. Chapter 2, “Embroidery Edit”, provides details on editing
embroidery patterns to create custom embroidery. Chapter 3, “How to Create Bobbin Work
(Embroidery)” gives instruction on creating dimensional embroidery.
Chapter 1 Embroidery Chapter 2 Embroidery Edit

Maximum 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) Designs can be combined, rotated or enlarged
for large embroidery designs Page E-56
Page E-2
Chapter 3 How to Create Bobbin

Work (Embroidery)
Medium to heavy weight thread wound on a bobbin can
be embroidered into a three-dimensional design.
Page E-86
A Appendix
This section provides important information for operating this machine.
Chapter 1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Find troubleshooting tips and pointers as well as how to keep your machine in the best working condition.
Page A-2
B-8
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
TRADEMARKS Calibrating the Sensor Pen.................................................... 76
INTRODUCTION................................................. 1 USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................ 1 STITCH .............................................................. 78
OUTSTANDING FEATURES ................................. 7 Sensor Function Area ........................................................... 78
Specifying the Guideline Marker Position
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE ..... 8 With the Sensor Pen ............................................................. 78
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen.... 80
FUNCTIONS........................................................ 12 Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width and Stitch
Machine .............................................................................. 12 Position ................................................................................ 81
Needle and Presser Foot Section .......................................... 13 Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point.......... 83
Embroidery Unit .................................................................. 14 USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN
Operation Buttons................................................................ 14 “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE ...... 85
Using the Flat Bed Attachment ............................................. 15
Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen ... 85
Included Accessories ........................................................... 16
Options................................................................................ 18
S Sewing
B Basic operations
Chapter1 Sewing Basics 2
Chapter1 Getting Ready 20 SEWING .............................................................. 3
Sewing a Stitch ....................................................................... 3
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF .................. 21 Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ............................................... 5
Setting Your Machine for the First Time ............................... 22
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ........................................ 5
LCD SCREEN ...................................................... 24 Sewing Curves........................................................................ 7
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ................................. 28 Changing Sewing Direction .................................................... 7
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key .................................. 36 Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics .................................................. 7
Using the Operation Guide Function ................................... 37 Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener ............................................ 8
Using the Sewing Guide Function ........................................ 38 Sewing Lightweight Fabrics .................................................... 9
Using the Pattern Explanation Function................................ 39 Sewing Stretch Fabrics............................................................ 9
LOWER THREADING......................................... 40 STITCH SETTINGS ............................................. 10
Winding the Bobbin............................................................. 40 Setting the Stitch Width ........................................................ 10
Setting the Bobbin................................................................ 45 Setting the Stitch Length ....................................................... 10
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread.............................................. 47 Setting the “L/R SHIFT”......................................................... 11
UPPER THREADING .......................................... 48 Setting the Thread Tension ................................................... 12
Upper Threading.................................................................. 48 USEFUL FUNCTIONS ........................................ 13
Using the Twin Needle Mode .............................................. 52 Automatic Thread Cutting .................................................... 13
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .................................... 54 Adjusting the Needle Drop Position with the Guideline Marker
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT ...................... 55 (For models equipped with the guideline marker) ................. 14
Removing the Presser Foot ................................................... 55 Using the Knee Lifter ............................................................ 15
Attaching the Presser Foot .................................................... 55 Pivoting ................................................................................ 15
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter .......... 55 Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot
CHANGING THE NEEDLE.................................. 57 Pressure)............................................................................... 17
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC ................... 59 Needle Position – Stitch Placement ...................................... 18
Locking the Screen ............................................................... 18
About the Needle................................................................. 59
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations .................................... 60
BEFORE EMBROIDERING .................................. 61 Chapter2 Utility Stitches 20
Embroidery Step by Step ...................................................... 61 SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ......................... 21
Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer.............. 62 Selecting a Stitch .................................................................. 21
Attaching the Embroidery Unit ............................................. 65 Saving Your Stitch Settings ................................................... 22
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE SEWING THE STITCHES .................................... 24
ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE ........................ 67 Straight Stitches .................................................................... 24
Using USB Media or Embroidery Card Reader/USB Card Writer Dart Seam ............................................................................ 28
Module* .............................................................................. 67 Gathering ............................................................................. 29
Connecting the Machine to the Computer............................ 67 Flat Fell Seam ....................................................................... 29
Using a USB Mouse ............................................................. 68 Pintuck ................................................................................. 30
Using the Dual Feed Foot .................................................... 68 Zigzag Stitches ..................................................................... 31
Elastic Zigzag Stitches .......................................................... 33
Chapter2 Sensor Functions 72 Overcasting .......................................................................... 33
Quilting................................................................................ 35
CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE Blind Hem Stitches ............................................................... 45
SENSOR PEN ...................................................... 73 Appliqué .............................................................................. 48
CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN ..................... 73 Shelltuck Stitches ................................................................. 49
Using the Sensor Pen Holder ............................................... 74 Scallop Stitches .................................................................... 50
USING THE SENSOR PEN .................................. 75 Crazy Quilting...................................................................... 50
Using the Sensor Pen ........................................................... 75 Smocking Stitches ................................................................ 51
Fagoting ............................................................................... 52
Important Information about Sensor Pen .............................. 75
Tape or Elastic Attaching ...................................................... 52
B-9
CONTENTS
Heirloom.............................................................................. 53 Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer ....................... 8

One-step Buttonholes........................................................... 55 VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN ........... 9
Darning ................................................................................ 58 PREPARING THE FABRIC .................................. 11
Bar Tacks ............................................................................. 59 Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric ............ 11
Button Sewing ...................................................................... 61
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame....................... 13
Eyelet ................................................................................... 62 Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges......................... 16
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch) ..... 63
Zipper Insertion.................................................................... 64
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME .......... 17
STITCH SETTING CHART................................... 68 CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ......... 19
Checking the Pattern Position .............................................. 19
Previewing the Completed Pattern ....................................... 20
Chapter3 Character/Decorative Stitches 76
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN............... 21
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS.......................... 77 Embroidering Attractive Finishes.......................................... 21
Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch Sewing Embroidery Patterns................................................. 22
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué ............... 23
Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns .......... 78 ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
Characters ............................................................................ 78
PROCESS ............................................................. 26
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS .............................. 81 If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ........................................ 26
Sewing Attractive Finishes .................................................... 81
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing ..................................... 27
Basic Sewing ........................................................................ 81
Restarting from the Beginning .............................................. 28
Making Adjustments............................................................. 82
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power .............. 28
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS ............................. 84 MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS........... 30
Changing the Size ................................................................ 86
Adjusting Thread Tension .................................................... 30
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .... 87
Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with No Color on the Screw) .... 31
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image .......................................... 87
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ...................................... 87
(END COLOR TRIM)............................................................ 32
Sewing a Pattern Continuously ............................................. 87 Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)....... 32
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only)...... 88 Adjusting the Embroidery Speed .......................................... 33
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern ............................. 88
Changing the Thread Color Display ..................................... 34
Checking the Image.............................................................. 89 Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display” .......................... 35
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS ...................... 90 REVISING THE PATTERN................................... 36
Before Combining ................................................................ 90 Moving the Pattern .............................................................. 36
Combining Various Stitch Patterns........................................ 90
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle .................................... 36
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns........................... 91 Changing the Size of the Pattern .......................................... 37
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns.............. 92 Rotating the Pattern ............................................................. 38
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length ...................... 92
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ..................................... 39
Making Step Stitch Patterns Enlarging the Editing Screen................................................. 39
(for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ..................................... 93 Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................... 95 Patterns Only) ...................................................................... 40
Stitch Data Precautions ........................................................ 95 Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns ............ 40
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory................... 96 Embroidering Linked Characters .......................................... 41
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media ..................................... 97 Uninterrupted Embroidering (Monochrome - Using a Single
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer ................................. 98 Color) .................................................................................. 43
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ......... 99 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ................... 44
Recalling from USB Media ................................................. 100 Embroidery Data Precautions............................................... 44
Recalling from the Computer.............................................. 101
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ......... 46
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media ........................... 47
Chapter4 How to Create Bobbin Work Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer ....................... 48
(Sewing) 104 Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory .................. 49
Recalling from USB Media................................................... 50
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK .................................. 105 Recalling from the Computer ............................................... 51
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK ................... 105 EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS .......................... 52
Required Materials ............................................................. 105
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1) ................... 52
Upper Threading ................................................................ 106
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2) ................... 53
Preparing the Bobbin Thread .............................................. 107
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns......................................... 54
CREATING BOBBIN WORK ............................. 111
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing ...................................... 111 Chapter2 Embroidery Edit 56
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing...................................... 113
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION .............. 114 EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS....................... 57
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 115 SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT ....................... 58
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral
Alphabet Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work Patterns ................... 59
E Embroidering Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns.................................. 59
EDITING PATTERNS .......................................... 61
Moving the Pattern .............................................................. 63
Chapter1 Embroidery 2 Rotating the Pattern ............................................................. 63
Changing the Size of the Pattern .......................................... 63
SELECTING PATTERNS......................................... 3 Deleting the Pattern ............................................................. 63
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200% ......... 63
Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns ............................................. 4 Changing the Configuration of Character Patterns................ 64
Selecting Character Patterns ................................................... 5 Changing Character Spacing................................................ 64
Selecting Frame Patterns......................................................... 7 Reducing Character Spacing ................................................ 65
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards .............................. 7 Separating Combined Character Patterns ............................. 65
B-10
CONTENTS
Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern ....... 66

Embroidering Linked Characters .......................................... 67
Changing the Thread Color .................................................. 67
Creating a Custom Thread Table .......................................... 68
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table ................. 72
Designing Repeated Patterns ................................................ 73
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly ................................... 77
Duplicating a Pattern ........................................................... 79
After Editing ......................................................................... 79
COMBINING PATTERNS ................................... 80
Editing Combined Patterns ................................................... 80
Sewing Combined Patterns .................................................. 83
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ......... 84
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Monochrome - Using a Single
Color) .................................................................................. 84
Basting Embroidery .............................................................. 84
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................... 85
Chapter3 How to Create Bobbin Work

(Embroidery) 86
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK .................................... 87
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK ..................... 87
Required Materials ............................................................... 87
Upper Threading.................................................................. 88
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ............................................... 88
CREATING BOBBIN WORK............................... 92
Selecting the Pattern ............................................................ 92
Start Embroidering ............................................................... 93
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION ................ 96
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................ 97
A Appendix
Chapter1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 2
CARE AND MAINTENANCE................................. 3
Restrictions on oiling ............................................................. 3
Precautions on storing the machine ....................................... 3
Cleaning the LCD Screen ....................................................... 3
Cleaning the Machine Casing ................................................ 3
Cleaning the Race .................................................................. 3
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area ......................... 5
About the Maintenance Message ........................................... 5
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN.................................... 6
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display ....................... 6
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning............................................... 6
TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................... 7
Frequent troubleshooting topics ............................................. 7
Upper thread is too tight ........................................................ 7
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric .................................. 8
Incorrect thread tension ....................................................... 10
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed...... 11
List of Symptoms .................................................................. 14
ERROR MESSAGES ............................................. 18
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 21
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE ..... 22
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ................................. 22
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ................................... 23
INDEX ................................................................ 24
B-11
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before
using the sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.
Machine
■ Front View ■ Right-side/Rear View
a Connector for the presser foot

Connect the dual feed foot or embroidery foot with LED
pointer. (page B-62, B-68)
b Handle
a Top cover Carry the sewing machine by its handle when transporting the
Open the top cover to thread the machine and wind the machine.
bobbin. c Presser foot lever
b Pre-tension disk Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk when winding the presser foot. (page B-55)
bobbin thread. (page B-40) d Air vent
c Thread guide for bobbin winding The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate.
Pass the thread through this thread guide when winding the Do not cover the air vent while the sewing machine is being
bobbin thread. (page B-40) used.
d Spool pin e Main power switch
Place a spool of thread on the spool pin. (page B-48) Use the main power switch to turn the sewing machine ON and
e Spool cap OFF. (page B-21)
Use the spool cap to hold the spool of thread in place. f Foot controller
(page B-48) Depress the foot controller to control the speed of the machine.
f Supplemental spool pin (page S-4)
Use this spool pin to wind the bobbin thread, or to sew with the g Power cord receptacle
twin needle. (page B-40, B-52) Insert the power cord into the machine receptacle. (page B-21)
g Bobbin winder h Sensor pen holder connector
Use the bobbin winder when winding the bobbin. (page B-40) Connect the included sensor pen holder. (page B-74)
h LCD (liquid crystal display) i Sensor pen jack
Settings for the selected stitch and error messages appear in Connect the sensor pen. (page B-73)
the LCD. (page B-24) j Foot controller jack
i Speaker Insert the foot controller plug into its jack on the machine.
j Knee lifter (page S-4)
Use the knee lifter to raise and lower the presser foot. k USB port for computer
(page S-15) In order to import/export patterns between a computer and the
k Knee lifter slot machine, plug the USB cable into the USB port. (page B-67,
Insert the knee lifter into the slot. (page S-15) S-98, E-48)
l Operation buttons (7 buttons) and sewing speed l USB port for mouse / media
controller In order to send patterns from/to USB media, plug the USB
media directly into the USB port. (page B-67, S-97, E-47)
Use these buttons and the slide to operate the sewing Connect the USB mouse to operate with mouse. (page B-68)
machine. (page B-14)
m Handwheel
m Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise
Store presser feet and bobbins in the accessory compartment and lower the needle. The wheel should be turned toward the
of the flat bed attachment. When sewing cylindrical pieces, front of the machine.
remove the flat bed attachment. (page B-15)
n Thread cutter
Pass the threads through the thread cutter to cut them.
(page B-50)
o Thread guide plate
Pass the thread around the thread guide plate when threading
upper thread. (page B-48)
B-12
Needle and Presser Foot Section

Measurements on the needle plate, bobbin cover
(with mark) and needle plate cover
The measurements on the needle plate and bobbin
cover are references for patterns with a middle
(center) needle position. The measurements on the
needle plate cover are references for stitches with
a left needle position.
a Buttonhole lever
The buttonhole lever is used with the one-step buttonhole foot
to create buttonholes. (page S-55) e
b Presser foot holder screw
Use the presser foot holder screw to hold the presser foot in
place. (page B-55, B-62)
c Presser foot holder f
The presser foot is attached to the presser foot holder.
(page B-55)
d Presser foot b
The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the a For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
selected stitch. (page B-55)
e Feed dogs b For stitches with a left needle position
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction. c Middle (center) needle position <inch>
f Bobbin cover d Middle (center) needle position <cm>
Open the bobbin cover to set the bobbin. (page B-45, S-32) e Middle (center) needle position <inch>
g Needle plate cover f Left needle position <inch>
Remove the needle plate cover to clean the race. (page S-26,
E-22)
h Needle plate
The needle plate is marked with guides to help sew straight
seams. (page S-26)
i Needle bar thread guide
Pass the upper thread through the needle bar thread guide.
(page B-48)
j Needle clamp screw
Use the needle clamp screw to hold the needle in place.
(page B-57)
B-13
Embroidery Unit Operation Buttons
a Carriage
The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when
embroidering. (page B-65)
b Release button (located under the embroidery unit)
Press the release button to remove the embroidery unit. a “Start/Stop” button
(page B-65) Press this button and the machine will sew a few stitches at a
c Embroidery frame holder slow speed and then begin sewing at the speed set by the
Insert the embroidery frame into the embroidery frame holder sewing speed controller. Press the button again to stop the
to hold the frame in place. (page E-17) machine. Hold the button in to sew at the machine’s slowest
d Frame-securing lever speed. The button changes color according to the machine’s
Press the frame-securing lever down to secure the embroidery operation mode.
frame. (page E-17) Green: The machine is ready to sew or is sewing.
e Embroidery unit connection
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the connection port Red: The machine cannot sew.
when attaching the embroidery unit. (page B-65)
b “Reverse Stitch” button
CAUTION For straight, zigzag, and elastic zigzag stitch patterns that take
reverse stitches, the machine will sew reverse stitches at low
speed only while holding down the “Reverse Stitch” button.
• Before inserting or removing the embroidery The stitches are sewn in the opposite direction. For other
unit, turn the main power to OFF. stitches, use this button to sew reinforcement stitches at the
beginning and end of sewing. Press and hold this button, and
• After the embroidery frame is set in the frame the machine sews 3 stitches in the same spot and stops
holder, be sure the frame-securing lever is automatically. (see page S-5)
correctly lowered. c “Reinforcement Stitch” button
Use this button to sew a single stitch repeatedly and tie-off. For
character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with a
full pattern instead of mid-point. The LED light beside this
button lights up while the machine is stitching the last full motif,
and automatically turns off when the sewing is stopped. (see
page S-5)
d “Needle Position” button

Use this button when changing sewing direction or for detailed
sewing in small areas. Press this button to raise or lower the
needle position. With this button, you can lower and raise the
needle to sew a single stitch.
e “Thread Cutter” button

Press this button after sewing to automatically trim the excess
thread.
f “Presser Foot Lifter” button

Press this button to lower the presser foot and apply pressure
to the fabric. Press this button again to raise the presser foot.
g Sewing Speed controller

Use this controller to adjust the sewing speed. Move the slide
to the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the slide to the right
to sew at higher speeds. Beginners should sew at a slow
speed.
h “Automatic Threading” button

Use this button to automatically thread the needle.
B-14
CAUTION
• Do not press the thread cutter button after the
threads have been cut. The needle may break
and threads may become tangled, or damage
to the machine may occur.
Using the Flat Bed Attachment

Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the
accessory compartment.
A presser foot storage tray is stored in the accessory

compartment of the flat bed attachment.
a Storage space of the flat bed attachment

b Presser foot storage space of the flat bed
attachment
c Presser foot storage tray
There are also storage spaces for optional presser
feet.
B-15
Included Accessories
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
75/11 2 needles
90/14 2 needles
90/14 2 needles: 2.0/11 needle 75/11
Ball point needle (gold colored) 2 needles
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
54 55 56
B-16
No. Part Name Part Code No. Part Name Part Code
1 Zigzag foot “J” (on machine) XF3022-001 51 Sensor pen holder XF4702-001
2 Monogramming foot “N” X53840-351 52 Pen holder XF2973-001
3 Overcasting foot “G” XC3098-051 53 Dust cover XF4694-001
4 Zipper foot “I” X59370-051 54 Accessory bag XC4487-021
5 Buttonhole foot “A” X57789-251 55 Instruction and Reference XF3648-001
Guide
6 Blind stitch foot “R” X56409-051
56 Quick Reference Guide XF3649-001
7 Button fitting foot “M” 130489-001
8 Straight stitch foot XD0826-051
9 Embroidery foot “W+” with XF3124-001 Memo
LED pointer • Foot controller: Model T
10 1/4” quilting foot with guide XC6800-251 This foot controller can be used on the
11 Free motion open toe quilting XF4873-001 machine model: BLTY.
foot “O”
• Always use accessories recommended for
12 Dual feed foot XF4068-001 this machine.
13 Adapter XF3613-001
14 Screw (small) XA4813-051
15 Needle set X58358-051
16 Twin needle X59296-151
17 Ball point needle set XD0705-051
18 Bobbin × 10 X52800-150
(One is on machine.)
19 Seam ripper XF4967-001
20 Scissors XC1807-121
21 Cleaning brush X59476-051
22 Eyelet punch XZ5051-001
23 Screwdriver (small) X55468-051
24 Screwdriver (large) XC4237-021
25 Disc-shaped screwdriver XC1074-051
26 Vertical spool pin XC8619-052
27 Spool cap (small) 130013-154
28 Spool cap (medium) × 2 X55260-153
(One is on machine.)
29 Spool cap (large) 130012-054
30 Spool cap (mini insert) XA5752-121
31 Spool felt (on machine) X57045-051
32 Spool net × 2 XA5523-050
33 Embroidery needle plate XE5131-001
cover
34 Touch pen (stylus) XA9940-051
35 Knee lifter XA6941-052
36 USB cable XD0745-051
37 Alternate bobbin case XC8167-551
(no color on the screw)
38 Bobbin center pin and XC8661-251
instruction sheet
39 Bobbin case (gray, for bobbin XE8298-001
work)
40 Straight stitch needle plate XF3076-001
41 Cord guide bobbin cover XE8991-101
(with single hole)
42 Bobbin cover (with mark) (on XF0750-101
machine)
43 Bobbin cover XE8992-101
44 Foot controller XC8816-051
45 Embroidery frame set (large) EF75: Frame
H 180 mm × W 130 mm EF79: Embroidery sheet
(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)
46 Embroidery frame set EF76: Frame
(extra large) EF80: Embroidery sheet
H 300 mm × W 180 mm
47 Embroidery bobbin thread BBT-W
48 Stabilizer material X81176-001
49 Power cord XC6052-051
50 Chalk pencil XE8568-001
B-17
Options
The following are available as optional accessories to be purchased separately from your authorized Baby
Lock retailer.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
No. Part Name Part Code

1 Multi function foot controller BLMA-MFC Memo
2 Square embroidery frame BLMA-150 • All specifications are correct at the time of
H 150 mm × W 150 mm (H 6 printing. Please be aware that some
inches × W 6 inches)
specifications may change without notice.
3 Embroidery foot “W” XF4012-001
4 Border embroidery frame BLMA-CBH
H 300 mm × W 100 mm (H
12 inches × W 4 inches) Note
5 10 spool stand BLMA-TS • Embroidery cards purchased in foreign
6 2-spool thread stand BLMA-STS countries may not work with your machine.
7 Extension table BLMA-ET
• Visit your nearest authorized Baby Lock
8 Embroidery frame set (small) EF73: Frame retailer for a complete listing of optional
H 20 mm × W 60 mm (H 1 EF77: Embroidery sheet
inch × W 2-1/2 inches) accessories and embroidery cards available
9 Embroidery frame set EF74: Frame for your machine.
(medium) EF78: Embroidery sheet
H 100 mm × W 100 mm (H 4
10 Border embroidery frame set BLSO-BF
H 180 mm × W 100 mm (H 7
11 Embroidery card Reader BLECR
12 Seam guide BLG-SG
13 Walking foot XA8320-103
14 Side cutter foot BLG-SCF
15 Free motion quilting foot “C” XF4737-001
16 Free motion echo quilting XE0766-001
foot “E”
17 Free-motion quilting foot FA2
18 Circular attachment BL-CSA
19 Edge joining foot ESG-EJF
20 USB mouse XE4904-101
B-18
Basic
operations
This section provides details on the initial setup procedures as well as descriptions of this machine’s more
useful functions.
Page number starts with “B” in this section.
Chapter1 Getting Ready .......................................................B-20

Chapter2 Sensor Functions ...................................................B-72

BBasic operations
Chapter 1
Getting Ready
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF ........................ 21 Using USB Media or Embroidery Card Reader/USB Card Writer
Module* ................................................................................... 67
Setting Your Machine for the First Time ...................................22
Connecting the Machine to the Computer ............................... 67
LCD SCREEN............................................................ 24 Using a USB Mouse.................................................................. 68
■ Clicking a Key ...........................................................................68
■ Home Page Screen ................................................................... 24
■ Changing Pages.........................................................................68
■ Utility Stitch Screen ................................................................. 25
Using the Dual Feed Foot......................................................... 68
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 26
■ Attaching the Dual Feed Foot ...................................................69
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ......................................28
■ Replacing the Sole Part of the Dual Feed Foot..........................69
■ Selecting the “Eco Mode” or “Shutoff Support Mode”............. 32
■ Using the Dual Feed Position Lever ..........................................69
■ Changing the Pointer Shape When a USB Mouse Is Used ........ 32
■ Adjusting the Amount of Fabric Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot.......70
■ Selecting the Initial Screen Display .......................................... 32
■ Choosing the Display Language................................................ 33
■ Changing the Background Colors of the Embroidery Patterns....... 33
■ Specifying the Size of Pattern Thumbnails ............................... 34
■ Saving a Settings Screen Image to USB Media.......................... 35
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key .......................................36
Using the Operation Guide Function ........................................37
Using the Sewing Guide Function .............................................38
Using the Pattern Explanation Function ....................................39
LOWER THREADING .............................................. 40
Winding the Bobbin..................................................................40
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin............................................ 40
■ Using the Spool Pin .................................................................. 43
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the Bobbin Winder Seat ...... 44
Setting the Bobbin ....................................................................45
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread...................................................47
UPPER THREADING ................................................ 48
Upper Threading.......................................................................48
Using the Twin Needle Mode ..................................................52
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .........................................54
■ Using the Spool Net ................................................................. 54
■ Using the Vertical Spool Pin .................................................... 54
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT............................ 55
Removing the Presser Foot........................................................55
Attaching the Presser Foot ........................................................55
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter..............55
■ Attaching the Walking foot ...................................................... 56
CHANGING THE NEEDLE ....................................... 57
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC......................... 59

About the Needle......................................................................59
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations ........................................60
BEFORE EMBROIDERING........................................ 61
Embroidery Step by Step ..........................................................61
Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer .................62
■ Attaching the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer .......... 62
■ Checking the Needle Drop Point With the
Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer ................................ 63
■ Adjusting the LED Pointer ........................................................ 64
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the LED Pointer............................. 64
Attaching the Embroidery Unit .................................................65
■ About the Embroidery Unit ...................................................... 65
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit ............................................... 66
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE
ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE ............................. 67

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

B
WARNING
• Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,
1
electric shock, or damage to the machine.
Getting Ready
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the power
cord receptacle on the machine.
• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the following circumstances:
When you are away from the machine
After using the machine
When the power fails during use
When the machine does not operate correctly due to a bad connection or a disconnection
During electrical storms
CAUTION
• Use only the power cord included with this machine.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with many other appliances plugged in to them. Fire or
electric shock may result.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove
it from the outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled.
Do not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to heat. These things may damage the
cord, or cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is damaged, take the machine to your authorized
retailer for repairs before continuing use.
• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a fire may
result.
• When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or
the plug must be removed from the socket-outlet.
• When servicing the machine or when removing covers, the machine must be unplugged.
• For U.S.A. only
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a qualified
electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.
Basic operations B-21

a d
Insert the power supply cord into the power Turn the main power switch to “O” to turn
cord receptacle, then insert the plug into a off the machine.
wall outlet.
Memo
• If the machine is turned off in the middle of
sewing in the “Sewing” function, the
operation will not continued after turning the
power on again.
Setting Your Machine for the First

Time
a Main power switch
When you first turn on the machine, set the
b Power supply cord
language and time/date to your language and local
time/date. Follow the procedure below when the
b
Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn
settings screen appears automatically.
on the machine.
a
Press and to set your local language.
a OFF
b ON
b
Note Press .
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on
the machine, the needle will automatically
c
move to the middle position. The message screen, confirming if you want
to set time/date, appears. To set the
Memo time/date, press ; to cancel the
• When the machine is turned on, the needle
and the feed dogs will make sound when setting, press .
they move; this is not a malfunction. → The screen to set time/date appears.
c
When the machine is turned on, the
opening movie is played. Touch anywhere
on the screen to display the Home page
screen.
CAUTION
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the
included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil,
screwdriver, or other hard or sharp object. It is
not necessary to press hard on the screen.
Pressing too hard or using a sharp object may
damage the screen.
B-22
d
Press or to set time/date.
B
1
a
Getting Ready
c d
a Press to display the time on the screen.

b Set the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).
c Select whether 24h or 12h setting to display.
d Set the current time.
e
Press to start using your machine.
→ The clock starts from 0 second of the time you set.
Note
• The time/date you set may be cleared, if
you don’t turn on the machine for a certain
period.

LCD SCREEN
LCD SCREEN
CAUTION
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil, screwdriver,
or other hard or sharp object. It is not necessary to press hard on the screen. Pressing too hard or using a
sharp object may damage the screen.
■ Home Page Screen
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

a “Utility and Decorative Press this key to sew utility stitches or character or decorative stitch See the “Key
Stitches” key patterns. Functions” table.
B-26
b “Embroidery” key Attach the embroidery unit and press this key to embroider patterns. E-3
c “Embroidery Edit” key Press this key to combine embroidery patterns. With the “Embroidery E-58
Edit” functions, you can also create original embroidery patterns or
frame patterns.
B-24
LCD SCREEN
■ Utility Stitch Screen

Press a key with your finger to select the stitch pattern, to select a machine function, or to select an
operation indicated on the key. When the key display is light gray, the function is not currently available. B
a
b
c
g
1
Getting Ready
d h
e f

a Needle position Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop –
setting display position.
Single needle/down Single needle/up position
position
Twin needle/down Twin needle/up position
position
b Selected stitch Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch. S-3
display
c Presser foot display Shows the presser foot code. Attach the presser foot indicated in this B-55
display before sewing.
d Stitch preview Shows a preview of the selected stitch. When shown at 100%, the S-21
stitch appears in the screen at nearly its actual size.
e Pattern display size Shows the approximate size of the pattern selected. S-21
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern

* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type
of fabric and thread that is used.
f Stitch selection Press the key for the pattern you want to sew. Use S-21
screen
to change to different stitch groups.
g Page display Shows additional pages that can be displayed. (Illustration shows page –
1 of 3.)
h Scroll key –
Press or , to move one page at a time, or touch anywhere on
the bar to jump ahead for additional pages of stitches.
* All key functions of the LCD are explained in the “Key Functions” table on the following page.

LCD SCREEN
■ Key Functions
a b c d
t e
s
r f
g
q
h
p
i
o j
k
n m l

a “Utility Stitch” key Press this key to select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem S-21
stitch, or other stitches commonly used in garment construction.
b “Character/ Press this key to select character or decorative stitch patterns. S-77
Decorative Stitch” key
c Screen lock key Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the various S-18
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot be
changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.
d Home page screen Press this key anytime it is displayed to return to the home page screen and B-24
key select a different category - “Utility and Decorative Stitches”, “Embroidery” or
“Embroidery Edit”.
e Needle mode Press this key to select twin needle sewing mode. The sewing mode changes B-52
selection key between single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you press the
(Single/Double) key. If the key display is light gray, the selected stitch pattern cannot be sewn
in the twin needle mode.
f Sensor function key Press this key to use the sensor function. B-78
g Image key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. S-22
h Machine’s memory Press this key to select from 3 memory functions; retrieving, storing or reset. S-22,
key S-96,
S-98
i “L/R SHIFT” key Shows the tendency of Left/Right of the center line of the original zigzag stitch S-11
currently selected stitch pattern.
j Thread tension key Shows the automatic thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch S-12
pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to change the thread tension
settings.
k Clock key Press this key to set the clock to your local time. B-22
l Presser foot/Needle Press this key before changing the needle, the presser foot, etc. This key locks B-55 to
exchange key all key and button functions to prevent operation of the machine. B-58
m Sewing machine help Press this key to see explanations on how to use the machine. B-36
key
n Machine setting Press this key to change the needle stop position, change the volume of B-28
mode key operation sound, adjust the pattern or screen, and change other machine
settings.
B-26
LCD SCREEN

o Stitch width and Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected S-10
stitch length key stitch pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to adjust the zigzag width
and stitch length settings. B
p Guideline marker key Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The
guideline marker makes it easier to sew stitches that align with the fabric edge
or other marker on the fabric.
S-14
1
q Mirror image key Press this key to create a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern. If the key S-21
Getting Ready
display is light gray, a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern cannot be
sewn.
r Automatic thread Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. Set the automatic S-13
cutting key thread cutting function before sewing to have the machine automatically sew
reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the
pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches) and trim the threads after
sewing.
s Automatic Press this key to use the automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching setting. S-5
reverse/reinforcement If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically sew
stitch key reverse stitches or reinforcement stitches depending on the pattern, at the
beginning and end of sewing.
t Free motion mode Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode. S-40
key The presser foot is raised to an appropriate height and the feed dog is lowered
for free motion quilting.
u Pivot key Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is selected, S-15
stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot
automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.
• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.

• Be sure the needle position on page B-29 of Machine Settings is set to the
down position.
For additional operational information, refer to page reference number listed above.

LCD SCREEN
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key

Press to change the default machine settings (needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening
display, etc.). To display the different settings screens, press for “Sewing settings”, for
“General settings” or for “Embroidery settings”.
Memo
• Press or next to the page numbers, to display a different settings screen.
Sewing settings
f
a i
g
j
b
k
c l
d h
m m m
a Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to determine the zigzag width (see page S-39).
b Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch patterns (see page S-82).
c Adjust the presser foot height. (Select the height of the presser foot when the presser foot is raised.)
d Adjust the presser foot pressure. (The higher the number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at “3”
for normal sewing.) (see page S-17)
If the dual feed foot is installed and its roller is lowered, the pressure setting is fixed at “2” and cannot be changed.
e Fine tune the feed of the dual feed foot (see page B-68).
f Select whether “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight stitch (Middle)” is the utility stitch that is automatically
selected when the machine is turned on. (see page S-21)
g Select whether “Utility Stitch” or “Quilt Stitch” displayed first on the stitch selection screen when the “Utility and
Decorative Stitches” is selected.
h You can activate this setting after connecting the optional multi-function foot controller. (These settings are not
operable unless the optional multi-function foot controller is attached to the machine.)
i Change the height of the presser foot when sewing is stopped when the pivot setting is selected (see page S-15).
Adjust the presser foot to one of the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm and 7.5 mm). (see page S-15)
j Change the height of the presser foot when the machine is set to free motion sewing mode (see page S-40).
k When set to “ON”, the thickness of the fabric is automatically detected by an internal sensor while sewing. This
enables the fabric to be fed smoothly (see pages S-8 and S-17).
l Adjust the guideline marker position and brightness (see page S-14).
m Press to save the current settings screen image to USB media (see page B-35)
B-28
LCD SCREEN
General settings
B
a
b
f
1
Getting Ready
c
g
d
e h
a Select the needle stop position (the needle position when the machine is not operating) to be up or down. Select
the down position when using the pivot key. (see page S-15)
b Select the operation of the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” button from the following two sequences (see
page S-18).
Each press of the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” button:
“ON” – raises the needle, stops it at a nearly lowered position, then lowers it
“OFF” – raises the needle, then lowers it
c Change the shape of the pointer when a USB mouse is used (see page B-32).
d Turn the “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” “ON” or “OFF”. If it is turned “OFF”, the machine can be used without
thread. (see page S-4, E-26)
CAUTION
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” is set to “OFF”, remove the upper thread. If the machine is used
with the upper thread threaded, the machine will not be able to detect if the thread has become tangled.
Continuing to use the machine with tangled thread may cause damage.
e Change the speaker volume. Increase the number for louder volume, decrease for softer volume.
f Select to save the machine power by setting the “Eco Mode” or the “Shutoff Support Mode” (see page B-32).
g Select the initial screen that is displayed when the machine is turned on (see page B-32).
h Change the display language (see page B-33).

LCD SCREEN
d
e
f
a Change the brightness of the needle area and work area lights.
b Change the screen display brightness (see page A-6).
c Calibrate the sensor function (see page B-76).
d Display the total number of stitches sewn on this machine, which is a reminder to take your machine in for regular
servicing. (Contact your authorized retailer for details.)
e The “No.” is the internal machine number for the embroidery and sewing machine.
f Display the program version. “Version 1” shows the program version of the LCD panel, “Version 2” shows the
program version of the machine.
Memo
• The latest version of software is installed in your machine. Check with your local authorized Baby Lock
retailer or at “ www.babylock.com ” for available updates (see page A-22).
B-30
LCD SCREEN
Embroidery settings
B
g
h
k
l
1
m
Getting Ready
a
b i
e j
a Select from among 16 embroidery frame displays (see page E-35).

b Change the thread color display on the “Embroidery” screen; thread number, color name (see page E-34).
c When the thread number “#123” is selected, select from six thread brands (see page E-34).
d Adjust the maximum embroidery speed setting (see page E-33).
e Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering (see page E-30).
f Select the height of the embroidery foot “W+” during embroidering (see page E-11).
g Change the initial mode of the display (Embroidery/Embroidery Edit) (see page E-3).
h Change the color of the background for the embroidery display area (see page B-33).
i Change the color of the background for the thumbnail area (see page B-33).
j Press to specify the size of pattern thumbnails (see page B-34).
k Change the display units from metric to standard measurements (mm/inch).
l Adjust the distance between the pattern and the basting stitching (see page E-84).
m Adjusting the position and brightness of the embroidery foot with LED pointer (see page B-64).

LCD SCREEN
■ Selecting the “Eco Mode” or ■ Changing the Pointer Shape When a

“Shutoff Support Mode” USB Mouse Is Used
You can save the machine power by setting the eco In the settings screen, the shape can be selected for
mode or the shutoff support mode. the pointer that appears when a USB mouse is
If you leave the machine without using for a connected. Depending upon the background color,
specified period of time, the machine enters in one select the desired shape from the three that are
of these modes. available.
“Eco Mode”;
Machine will enter a sleep mode. Touch the screen Memo
or any operational button to continue sewing. • For details on changing the background
color, refer to “Changing the Background
“Shutoff Support Mode”; Colors of the Embroidery Patterns” on
Machine will turn off after set period of time. Turn page B-33.
machine off and then back on to restart sewing.
a
Press .
Condition Eco Mode Shutoff Support
Mode → The settings screen appears.
b
Available time 0 - 120 (minute) 1 - 12 (hour)
Press .
“Start/Stop” button Green flashing Green slow flashing
Suspended function Machine light, All functions → The General settings screen appears.
Screen display, LED
c
pointer, Guideline Display page 4 of the General settings
marker screen.
After recovering The machine starts You need to turn off
d
from the previous the machine.
Use or to choose the pointer shape
operation.
from the three settings available ( ,
Press the “Start/Stop” button or touch the screen and ).
display to recover from these modes.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
d
Use or to select the time until
e
entering the mode. Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
■ Selecting the Initial Screen Display

The Initial screen that appears on the machine can
be changed.
a
Press .
Note
b
Press .
• If you turn off the machine while the
machine is in the “Eco Mode” or the → The General settings screen appears.
“Shutoff Support Mode”, wait for about 5
c
seconds before turning on the machine Display page 5 of the General settings
again. screen.
B-32
LCD SCREEN
d ■ Changing the Background Colors of

Use or to select the setting for the
initial screen display. the Embroidery Patterns
In the settings screen, the background colors can be B
1
changed for the embroidery pattern and pattern
thumbnails. Depending on the pattern color, select
the desired background color from the 66 settings
available. Different background colors can be
selected for the embroidery pattern and pattern
Getting Ready
thumbnails.
a
Press .
* Opening Screen: When the machine is turned on,
the home page screen appears after the opening → The settings screen appears.
movie screen is touched.
b
* Home Page: When the machine is turned on, the Press .
home page screen appears. → The Embroidery settings screen appears.
* Sewing/Embroidery Screen: When the machine is
turned on, the “Embroidery” screen appears if the
Memo
embroidery unit is attached to the machine, or the
sewing screen appears if the embroidery unit is not
• When using the “Embroidery” or
attached to the machine. “Embroidery Edit”, touch to
directly access the Embroidery settings
e
Press to return to the original screen. screen.
c
Display page 9 of the Embroidery settings
■ Choosing the Display Language screen.
a d
Press . Press .
b
Press .
c
Display page 5 of the General settings a
screen.
d
Use and to choose the display b
language.
* Select from “English”, “Deutsch (German)”, a Embroidery pattern background
“Français (French)”, “Italiano (Italian)”, “Nederlands b Pattern thumbnails background
(Dutch), “Español (Spanish)”, “Dansk (Danish)”,
“Norsk (Norwegian)”, “Suomi (Finnish)”, “Svenska
(Swedish)”, “Português (Portuguese)”, and “Русский
(Russian)”.
a Display language
e
Press to return to the original screen.

LCD SCREEN
e ■ Specifying the Size of Pattern

Select the background color from the 66
settings available. Thumbnails
The thumbnails for selecting an embroidery pattern
can be set to be displayed at the smaller size or a
larger size. The larger size is 1.5 times the smaller
a
size.
a Embroidery pattern background

b Selected color
a
Press .
b
b Press .
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display page 9 of the Embroidery settings
screen.
a Pattern thumbnails background

b Selected color
f
Memo
B-34
LCD SCREEN
d ■ Saving a Settings Screen Image to

Press or to select the desired
thumbnail size. USB Media
An image of the settings screen can be saved as a B
1
BMP file.
A maximum of 100 images can be saved on a single
USB media at one time.
a
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
Getting Ready
the right side of the machine.
Note
• When thumbnail size setting has been
changed the pattern selection screen will a USB port
not immediately reflect the chosen size. To b USB media
view the patterns with the new thumbnail
b
size, return to the category selection Press .
screen, and then select the pattern category
→ The settings screen appears. Select the settings
again.
screen page, make the changes that you want, and
then save the screen image.
c
Press .
→ The image file will be saved to the USB media.
d
Remove the USB media, and then for future
reference, check the saved image using a
computer.
The files for Settings screen images are saved with the
name “S##.BMP”.
* “##” in the name “S##.BMP” will automatically be
replaced with a number between S00 and S99.
Note
• If 100 image files have already been saved
on the USB media, the following message
appears. In this case, delete a file from the
USB media or use different USB media.

LCD SCREEN
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key

Press to open the sewing machine help screen. Three functions are available from the screen
shown below.
a Press this key to see explanation for upper threading, winding the bobbin, changing the presser foot, preparing to
embroider a pattern, and how to use the machine (see page B-37).
b Press this key to select utility stitches when you are not sure which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch (see page
B-38).
c Press this key to see an explanation of the stitch selected (see page B-39).
B-36
LCD SCREEN
Using the Operation Guide Function

B
1
Press to open the screen shown below. Six categories are displayed at the top of the screen.
Press a key to see more information about that category.
Getting Ready
displays information about displays information about displays information about
the main parts of the machine and their the operation buttons. threading the machine, changing presser
functions. This is the first screen displayed feet, etc. Some of the functions are described
in the movies. Watch these movies for a
when you press . better understanding of the functions. Certain
individual threading screens are animated.
displays information about displays troubleshooting displays information about

attaching the embroidery unit, preparing information. cleaning the machine, etc.
fabric for embroidering, etc.

LCD SCREEN
Example: Displaying information about

upper threading Using the Sewing Guide Function
a
Press . The sewing guide function can be used to select
patterns from the Utility Stitch screen.
b
Press . Use this function when you are not sure which
stitch to use for your application, or to get advice
about sewing particular stitches. For example, if
you want to sew overcasting, but you do not know
which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch, you
can use this screen to get advice. We recommend
that beginners use this method to select stitches.
c a
Press . Enter Utility Stitch category from the home
page.
→ The lower half of the screen will change.
b
Press .
d
Press (upper threading).
c
Press .
→ The advice screen is displayed.
d
Press the key of the category whose sewing
instructions you wish to view.
* Press to return to the original screen.
→ The screen shows instructions for threading the

machine.
e
Read the instructions.
* Press to see a video of the displayed

instructions.
Press under movie to go back to the
beginning. Press to pause. Press to
restart after pause. Press to close out the

movie.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view the previous page.
f
B-38
LCD SCREEN
e b
Read the explanations and select the Press .
appropriate stitch.
→ The screen displays directions for sewing the
selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the
B
*
stitch.
Press to view the next page. 1
Getting Ready
Using the Pattern Explanation
Function
If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch
pattern, select the pattern and press and
then to see an explanation of the
stitch selection.
c
Note Press .
• With the pattern explanation function,
descriptions can be displayed for the
patterns available on the Utility Stitch and
Character/Decorative Stitch screens.
• Descriptions are displayed for each pattern
in the Utility Stitch screen. Description for
the Character/Decorative Stitch category is
also displayed.
• If the key is not applicable for

the selected stitch, the warning “This key
cannot be used at this time” will appear.
Press twice and then enter the Utility
and Decorative Stitch category.
Example: Displaying information about
a
Press .
→ The screen shows information.
d
Memo
• The settings remain displayed to allow you
to fine tune the stitch.

LOWER THREADING
LOWER THREADING
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin
Winding the Bobbin With this machine, you can wind the bobbin
without unthreading the machine. While using the
Press → → → main spool pin to sew, you can conveniently wind
the bobbin using the supplemental spool pin.
→ in this order to display a video

example of bobbin winding on the LCD (see page
B-39). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
CAUTION
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code:
X52800-150).
a Supplemental spool pin
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
* Actual size
the bobbin on the shaft.
a This model
b Other models
c 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
a Groove in the bobbin

b Spring on the shaft
B-40
LOWER THREADING
c
Set the supplemental spool pin in the “up”
Memo
position.
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound
thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a
small space between the cap and the
B
thread spool.
1
Getting Ready
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
d
Place the spool of thread on the c Space
supplemental spool pin, so that thread
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
unrolls from the front. Push the spool cap
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
onto the spool pin as far as possible to high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
secure the thread spool. mini spool insert.
a Spool cap (mini insert)

b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
c 75 mm (3 inches)
e
With your right hand, hold the thread near
a Spool pin
the thread spool. With your left hand, hold
b Spool cap
the end of the thread, and use both hands to
c Thread spool
pass the thread through the thread guide.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
a Thread guide

LOWER THREADING
f h
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk Pass the end of the thread through the guide
making sure that the thread is under the slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the
pre-tension disk. thread to the right to cut the thread with
the cutter.
a Pre-tension disk
→ Make sure that the thread passes under the a Guide slit (with built-in cutter)
pre-tension disk. b Bobbin winder seat
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the process described. If the
thread is not cut with the cutter, and the
bobbin is wound, when the thread runs low it
b Pre-tension disk may tangle around the bobbin and cause the
c Pull it in as far as possible. needle to break.
→ Check to make sure thread is securely set between
i
pre-tension disks. Set the bobbin winding switch to the left,
until it clicks into place.
g
Wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin 5-6 Times.
a Bobbin winding switch
Memo
• Sliding the bobbin winding switch to the left
switches the machine into bobbin winding
mode.
→ The bobbin winding window appears.
B-42
LOWER THREADING
j k
Press . Cut the thread with scissors and remove the
→ Bobbin winding starts automatically. The bobbin bobbin.
stops rotating when bobbin winding is completed.
The bobbin winding switch will automatically return
B
1
to its original position.
Getting Ready
Note
• changes to while the bobbin
Memo
is winding.
• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on
• Stay near the machine while winding the the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could
bobbin to make sure the bobbin thread is loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,
being wound correctly. If the bobbin thread and could result in damage to the machine.
is wound incorrectly, press
immediately to stop the bobbin winding.
• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff
thread, such as nylon thread for quilting,
may be different from the one produced
CAUTION
• Setting the bobbin improperly may cause the
when winding normal thread; however, this thread tension to loosen, breaking the needle
is not a sign of a malfunction. and possibly resulting in injury.
Memo
• You can change the winding speed by
pressing (to decrease) or (to
increase) in the bobbin winding window.
■ Using the Spool Pin
You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin
before sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to
wind the bobbin while sewing.
• Press to minimize the bobbin

winding window. Then, you can perform
other operations, such as selecting a stitch
or adjusting the thread tension, while the
bobbin is being wound.
• Press (in top right of the LCD screen)
to display the bobbin winding window
again.

LOWER THREADING
a f
Turn the main power to ON and open the Pass the thread through the thread guide.
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
a Thread guide
g
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk
making sure that the thread is under the
pre-tension disk.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
c
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
a Thread guide
b Pre-tension disk
h
Follow steps g through k on page B-42
through B-43.
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the
Bobbin Winder Seat
a Spool pin
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not
b Spool cap
passed through the pre-tension disk correctly, the
c Thread spool thread may become tangled beneath the bobbin
d Spool felt winder seat.
Wind off the thread according to the following
d
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far procedure.
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
e
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread
b Bobbin winder seat
CAUTION
• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if
the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin
winder seat. It may result in injuries.
a Thread guide plate
B-44
LOWER THREADING
a
If the thread becomes tangled under the
bobbin winder seat, press once to Setting the Bobbin
stop the bobbin winding. B
→ → →
1
Press

example of the operation on the LCD (see page
Getting Ready
b
Cut the thread with scissors near the
pre-tension disk.
CAUTION
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
a Pre-tension disk
c
Push the bobbin winder switch to the right, • The included bobbin was designed specifically
and then raise the bobbin at least 10 cm for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
(4 inches) from the shaft. models are used, the machine will not operate
X52800-150).
d
Cut the thread near the bobbin and hold the
thread end with your left hand. Unwind the
thread clockwise near the bobbin winder
seat with your right hand as shown below. * Actual size
a This model
b Other models
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
sure to press in the LCD, otherwise
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button
or any other button is pressed and the machine
starts sewing.
a
Press .
e
Wind the bobbin again.
Note
• Make sure that the thread passes through
the pre-tension disk correctly (page B-42).

LOWER THREADING
b e
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right. While lightly holding down bobbin with
your right hand as shown, guide the thread
through the slit (a and b).
* At this time, check that the bobbin easily rotates
counterclockwise.
Then, pull the thread toward you to cut it

with the cutter (c).
a Bobbin cover
b Latch
→ The bobbin cover opens.
c
Remove the bobbin cover.
d
Insert the bobbin with your right hand so
that the end of the thread is on the left, and
then, after pulling the thread firmly around
a Slit
the tab with your left hand as shown, lightly
b Cutter (Cut the thread with the cutter.)
pull the thread to guide it through the slit.
→ The cutter cuts the thread.
Make sure that the thread is correctly

passed through the flat spring of the bobbin
case. If it is not inserted correctly, reinstall
the thread.
a Tab
* Be sure to insert the bobbin correctly.
CAUTION a Flat spring

1
• Be sure to install the bobbin so that the thread

unwinds in the correct direction, otherwise
the thread may break or the thread tension will
be incorrect. CAUTION
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread
Memo correctly. Otherwise, the thread may break or
• The order that the bobbin thread should be the thread tension will be incorrect.
passed through the bobbin case is
indicated by marks around the bobbin case.
Be sure to thread the machine as indicated.
B-46
LOWER THREADING
f c
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
bobbin cover (1), and then lightly press the needle.
down on the right side to close the cover
(2). d
Gently pull the upper thread. A loop of the B
1
bobbin thread will come out of the hole in
the needle plate.
Getting Ready
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread
There may be some sewing applications where
you want to pull up the bobbin thread; for
example, when making gathers, darts, or doing
e
free motion quilting or embroidery. Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the
presser foot and pull it about
100 mm (approx. 4 inches) toward the back
Memo
• You can pull up the bobbin thread after of the machine, making it even with the
threading the upper thread (“UPPER upper thread.
THREADING” on page B-48).
a
Guide the bobbin thread through the
groove, following the arrow in the
illustration.
* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
* Do not replace the bobbin cover.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
f
Replace the bobbin cover.
b
While holding the upper thread, press the
“Needle Position” button to lower the
needle.
a “Needle Position” button

UPPER THREADING
UPPER THREADING
a
Turn the main power to ON.
Upper Threading
b
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
Press → → → raise the presser foot.

example of the operation on the LCD (see page
CAUTION
• Be sure to thread the machine properly.
→ The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
Improper threading can cause the thread to
tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.
• When using the walking foot, the side cutter or
accessories not included with this machine,
attach the accessory to the machine after
threading the machine.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be
used with sewing machine needle sizes
75/11 through 100/16.
• Thread such as transparent nylon a Upper thread shutter
monofilament thread and thread with a
thickness of 130/20 or thicker cannot be
used with the automatic threading function. Memo
• The automatic threading function cannot be • This machine is equipped with an upper
used with the wing needle or the twin thread shutter, allowing you to check that
needle. the upper threading is performed correctly.
c
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
Note
• If you try to thread the needle automatically
without raising the needle, the thread may
not thread correctly.
B-48
UPPER THREADING
d
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that Memo
the thread unwinds from the front of the • When sewing with fine, cross-wound
spool. thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a B
1
small space between the cap and the
thread spool.
Getting Ready
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
a Spool pin c Space
b Spool cap
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
c Thread spool
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
d Spool felt high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
mini spool insert.
e
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set a Spool cap (mini insert)
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
pin and cause the needle to break. c 75 mm (3 inches)
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
f
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a While holding the thread with both hands,
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is pull the thread up from under the thread
used, the thread may become caught in the slit guide plate.
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
g
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.

UPPER THREADING
h k
Guide the thread down, up, then down Pass the thread through the thread guide
through the groove, as shown in the disks (marked “7”). Make sure that the
illustration. thread passes through the groove in the
thread guide.
a Groove in thread guide

Memo
l
• Look in the upper groove area to check if Pull the thread up through the thread cutter
the thread catches on the take-up lever to cut the thread, as shown in the
visible inside the upper groove area. illustration.
a Look in the upper groove area

a Thread cutter
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the Note
thread with both hands and guiding it as • When using thread that quickly winds off
shown in the illustration. the spool, such as metallic thread, it may be
difficult to thread the needle if the thread is
cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread
cutter, pull out about 80 mm (approx. 3
inches) of thread after passing it through the
thread guide disks (marked “7”).
a Needle bar thread guide
j
lower presser foot.
a 80 mm (approx. 3 inches) or more
B-50
UPPER THREADING
m
Press the “Automatic Threading” button to
have the machine automatically thread the Memo
needle. • If the needle could not be threaded or the
thread was not passed through the needle B
1
bar thread guides, perform the procedure
again starting from step c.
Then, pass the thread through the eye of
the needle after step i.
Getting Ready
Note
→ The thread passes through the eye of the needle.
• Some needles cannot be threaded with the
needle threader. In this case, instead of
Memo using the needle threader after passing the
• When the “Automatic Threading” button is thread through the needle bar thread guide
pressed, the presser foot will be (marked “6”), manually pass the thread
automatically lowered. After threading is through the eye of the needle from the front
finished, the presser foot moves back to the to the back.
position before the “Automatic Threading”
button was pressed.
n
Carefully pull the end of the thread that was
passed through the eye of the needle.
* If a loop was formed in the thread passed through
the eye of the needle, carefully pull on the loop of
thread through to the back of the needle.
Note
• Pulling the loop of thread gently will avoid
needle breakage.
o
Pull out about 10-15 cm (approx. 4-6
inches) of the thread, and then pass it under
the presser foot toward the rear of the
machine.
→ Raise the presser foot lever if the presser foot is
lowered.
a About 10-15 cm (approx. 4-6 inches)

UPPER THREADING
b
Thread the machine for the first needle
Using the Twin Needle Mode according to the procedure for threading a
single needle (“Upper Threading” on
The twin needle can only be used for patterns that page B-48).
show after being selected. Before you select a
stitch pattern, make sure the stitch can be sewn in
the twin needle mode (refer to the “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page S-68).
CAUTION
• Twin needle (part code X59296-151) is
recommended for this machine. Contact your
c
authorized retailer for replacement needles Pass the thread through the needle bar
(size 2.0/11 is recommended). thread guides on the needle bar, then
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when thread the needle on the left side manually.
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
• Do not sew with bent needles. The needle
could break and cause injury.
• When using the twin needle, it is
recommended to use presser foot “J”.
• When the twin needle is used, bunched
stitches may occur depending on the types of
fabric and thread that are used. Note
Use monogramming foot “N” for decorative • The “Automatic Threading” button cannot
stitches. be used. Manually thread the twin needle
from front to back. Using the “Automatic
• Before changing the needle or threading the Threading” button may result in damage to
machine, be sure to press on the LCD the machine.
Screen, otherwise injuries may occur if the
d
“Start/Stop” button or any other button is Pull up the supplemental spool pin and set it
pressed and the machine starts sewing. in the up position.
a
Press and install the twin needle
(“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57).
B-52
UPPER THREADING
e h
Place the additional spool of thread on the Continue threading however do not pass
supplemental spool pin, so that the thread the thread in the needle bar thread guide
unwinds from the front. Push the spool cap “6” on the needle bar. Thread the needle on
onto the spool pin as far as possible to the right side.
B
secure the thread spool.
1
Getting Ready
i
Press .
a Spool pin
j
b Spool cap Select a stitch pattern. (Example: )
c Thread spool * Refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on
page S-68 for the proper stitch to use with presser
f
Hold the thread from the spool with both foot “J”.
hands, and place the thread in the thread → The selected stitch is displayed.
guide.
* Do not place the thread in the pre-tension disks. Note
• If the key is light gray after selecting
the stitch, the selected stitch cannot be
sewn in the twin needle mode.
k
Press to select the twin needle mode.
a Thread guide
g
While holding the thread from the spool,
pull the thread through the lower notch in
the thread guide plate, then through the
upper notch. Hold the end of the thread
with your left hand, and then guide the
thread through the groove, following the
arrows in the illustration.
a Single needle/twin needle setting
→ appears.
CAUTION
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.

UPPER THREADING
l a
Start sewing. Insert the vertical spool pin onto the bobbin
Sample of Twin Needle Sewing winder shaft.
a Bobbin winder shaft

d b Vertical spool pin
c c Spool felt
d Thread spool
b
b
Memo Install the spool felt and the thread spool in
• To change direction when sewing with the that order, and then thread the upper
twin needle, raise the needle from the
fabric, raise the presser foot lever, and then
thread.
turn the fabric.
Memo
• When setting the thread spool, set it so that
Using Threads that Unwind the thread winds off from the front of the
spool.
Quickly • If using metallic thread, we recommend that
you use a 90/14 home sewing machine
■ Using the Spool Net needle.
If using transparent nylon monofilament thread, • Using the vertical spool pin with certain
metallic thread, or other strong thread, place the types of threads will keep the thread from
twisting as it comes off the spool pin.
included spool net over the spool before using it.
When using specialty threads, threading must be
done manually.
If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match it to
the spool size before placing it over the spool.
a Spool net
b Thread spool
c Spool pin
d Spool cap
Memo
• When threading the spool with the spool net
on, make sure that 5 cm - 6 cm (approx.
2 inches - 2-1/2 inches) of thread are pulled
out.
• It may be necessary to adjust the thread
tension when using the spool net.
■ Using the Vertical Spool Pin

Use the vertical spool pin when using an irregularly
shaped thread spool, and when sewing or
embroidering with metallic thread.
B-54
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT

B
• Always press
CAUTION
on the screen before changing the presser foot. If is not pressed and the
1
“Start/Stop” button or another button is pressed, the machine will start and may cause injury.
Getting Ready
• Always use the correct presser foot for the selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser foot is used, the
needle may strike the presser foot and bend or break, and may cause injury.
• Only use presser feet made for this machine. Using other presser feet may lead to accident or injury.
Removing the Presser Foot Attaching the Presser Foot
a
the needle. CAUTION
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in
the correct direction, otherwise the needle
may strike the presser foot, breaking the
needle and causing injuries.
a
Place the new presser foot under the
holder, aligning the foot pin with the notch
in the holder. Lower the presser foot lever
b
Press . so that the presser foot pin snaps into the
notch in the holder.
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot? ” appears on the LCD screen, press OK
to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
a Notch
b Pin
b
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
c
d
Press the black button on the presser foot Attaching the Presser Foot with
holder and remove the presser foot. the Included Adapter
You can attach optional presser feet using the
a included adapter and small screw. For example,
the walking foot, the free motion echo quilting foot
“E”, the free motion quilting foot and so on.
Following procedure shows how to attach the
walking foot as an example.
b
a Black button
b Presser foot holder

■ Attaching the Walking foot e

Insert the included small screw into the
The walking foot holds the fabric between the
threaded hole in the adapter and turn it 2 or
presser foot and the feed dogs to feed the fabric. This 3 times with your hand.
enables you to have better fabric control when
sewing difficult fabrics (such as quilted fabrics or
velvet) or fabrics that slip easily (such as vinyl,
leather, or synthetic leather).
a
Follow the steps in “Removing the Presser
Foot” in the previous page.
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder
to remove the presser foot holder.
f
Set the operation lever of the walking foot
so that the needle clamp screw is set
between the forks. Position the shank of the
walking foot on the adapter attached to the
presser foot bar.
a Disc-shaped screwdriver
c Presser foot holder screw
c
Remove the screw of the presser foot
completely from the presser foot shaft.
a Operation lever
b Needle clamp screw
c Fork
d Walking foot shank
e Adapter
g
Lower the presser foot lever. Tighten the
small screw securely with a large
screwdriver.
d
Set the adapter on the presser foot bar,
aligning the flat side of the adapter opening
with the flat side of the presser bar. Push it
up as far as possible, and then tighten the
screw securely with the screwdriver.
B-56
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
CHANGING THE NEEDLE

B
• Always press
CAUTION
on the screen before changing the needle. If is not pressed and the
1
Getting Ready
Start/Stop button or another operation button is pressed accidentally, the machine will start and injury
may result.
• Use only sewing machine needles made for home use. Other needles may bend or break and may cause
injury.
• Never sew with a bent needle. A bent needle will easily break and may cause injury.
c
Use the screwdriver to turn the screw
Memo toward the front of the machine and loosen
• To check the needle correctly, place the flat the screw. Remove the needle.
side of the needle on a flat surface. Check
the needle from the top and the sides.
Throw away any bent needles.
a Parallel space
b Level surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
Note
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise • Do not apply pressure to the needle clamp
the needle. screw. Doing so may damage the needle or
machine.
b
Press .
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot? ” appears on the LCD screen, press OK
to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole
in the needle plate with fabric or paper to
prevent the needle from falling into the
machine.

CHANGING THE NEEDLE
d
With the flat side of the needle facing the
back, insert the new needle all the way to
the top of the needle stopper (viewing
window) in the needle clamp. Use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the needle
clamp screw.
a Needle stopper
b Hole for setting the needle
c Flat side of needle
CAUTION
• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches
the stopper, and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with a screwdriver. If the needle
is not completely inserted or the needle clamp
screw is loose, the needle may break or the
machine may be damaged.
e
buttons.
B-58
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC

B
About the Needle
The sewing machine needle is probably the most important part of the sewing machine. Choosing the
1
proper needle for your sewing project will result in a beautiful finish and fewer problems. Below are some
Getting Ready
things to keep in mind about needles.
• The smaller the needle number, the finer the needle. As the numbers increase, the needles get thicker.
• Use fine needles with lightweight fabrics, and thicker needles with heavyweight fabrics.
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 with stretch fabrics.
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 when sewing character or decorative
stitches.
• Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. Use ball point needle 75/11 for embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters when the thread trimming function is turned on.
• Ball point needles (golden colored) 90/14 are only recommended for embroidery conditions stated above, as
they otherwise may bend or break.
• It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavyweight fabrics or
stabilizing products (for example, denim, puffy foam, etc.). A 75/11 needle may bend or break, which could
result in injury.
Note
• Never use a thread of weight 20 or lower. It may cause malfunctions.

Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
The following table provides information concerning the appropriate thread and needle for various
fabrics. Please refer to this table when selecting a thread and needle for the fabric you wish to use.
Fabric type/Application Thread Size of needle
Type Size
Medium weight fabrics Broadcloth Cotton thread 60 - 90 75/11 - 90/14
Taffeta Synthetic thread
Flannel, Gabardine Silk thread 50
Thin fabrics Lawn Cotton thread 60 - 90 65/9 - 75/11
Georgette Synthetic thread
Challis, Satin Silk thread 50
Thick fabrics Denim Cotton thread 30 90/14 - 100/16
50
Corduroy Synthetic thread 50 - 60
Tweed Silk thread
Stretch fabrics Jersey Thread for knits 50 - 60 Ball point needle
Tricot (gold colored)
75/11 - 90/14
Easily frayed fabrics Cotton thread 50 - 90 65/9 - 90/14
Synthetic thread
Silk thread 50
For top-stitching Synthetic thread 30 100/16
Silk thread 50 - 60 90/14 - 100/16
Memo
• For transparent monofilament nylon thread, always use needle sizes 90/14 or 100/16.
The same thread is usually used for the bobbin thread and upper thread.
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the needle, thread, and fabric combinations listed in the table. Using an improper
combination, especially a heavyweight fabric (i.e., denim) with a small needle (i.e., 65/9 - 75/11), may
cause the needle to bend or break, and lead to injury. Also, the seam may be uneven, the fabric may
pucker, or the machine may skip stitches.
B-60
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
B
Embroidery Step by Step
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for embroidery.
1
Getting Ready
Step 9
Step 6, 8
Step 3
Step 4
Step 1, 2
Step 7 Step 5
Step # Aim Action Page

1 Presser foot attachment Attach embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer. B-62
2 Checking the needle Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. * B-59
3 Embroidery unit attachment Attach the embroidery unit. B-65
4 Bobbin thread setup For the bobbin thread, wind embroidery bobbin thread and set it in place. B-40
5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to the fabric, and hoop it in the embroidery frame. E-11 to
E-17
6 Pattern selection Turn the main power to ON, and select an embroidery pattern. E-3
7 Embroidery frame attachment Attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit. E-17
8 Checking the layout Check and adjust the size and position of the embroidery. E-19
9 Embroidery thread setup Set up embroidery thread according to the pattern. E-21
* It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavy weight fabrics or stabilizing products (for example;
denim, puffy foam, etc.). Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 is not recommended for embroidery.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING
d
Push the black button on the presser foot
Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” holder and remove the presser foot.
with LED Pointer
By plugging in the connector on the back of your
machine, the embroidering needle drop point will
be indicated on the fabric, allowing you to
accurately position the pattern.
■ Attaching the Embroidery Foot

“W+” with LED Pointer
a Black button
CAUTION
• When attaching a presser foot, always press
→ Remove the presser foot from the presser foot
holder.
on the screen. You may accidentally
e
Use the included screwdriver to loosen the
press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly
cause injury.
screw of the presser foot holder, then
remove the presser foot holder.
• Be sure to use embroidery foot when doing
embroidery. Using another presser foot may
cause the needle to strike the presser foot,
causing the needle to bend or break and
possibly cause injury.
a
the needle.
a Screwdriver
c Presser foot holder screw
→ Remove the presser foot holder.
f
Position the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer on the presser foot bar by
aligning the notch of the presser foot to the
b
Press .
large screw.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and Side view
CAUTION
• When attaching a presser foot, always press
on the screen. You may accidentally
press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly
cause injury.
c
B-62
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
g ■ Checking the Needle Drop Point

Hold the embroidery foot in place with
your right hand, and then use the included With the Embroidery Foot “W+”
screwdriver to securely tighten the presser
foot holder screw. with LED Pointer B
1
Before beginning to embroider when using the
embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer, carefully
read the procedures described in the “Embroidery”
and “Embroidery Edit” chapters.
Getting Ready
a
Press in the embroidery screen.
→ The LED pointer indicates the needle drop point.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw of the embroidery foot. If the screw
is loose, the needle may strike the presser foot
and possibly cause injury.
h
Plug the connector of the embroidery foot
“W+” with LED pointer into the jack on the
back of your machine.
Memo
• When the LED pointer is turned on, the
presser foot height is automatically adjusted
according to the fabric thickness.
• If is pressed again, the fabric thickness
is remeasured and the presser foot is set to
the optimum height.
* The LED pointer turns off automatically by lowering

i
Press to unlock all keys and the presser foot or returning to the previous page.
buttons.
Note
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and • With bulky fabrics, the position may not be
the previous screen is displayed. accurate due to the various depths of the
fabric. In this case, manually adjust the
position according to the thickness of the
fabric.
• With fabric that has a very uneven surface
such as quilting, the fabric thickness may
not be correctly measured. In this case, the
pointer indication should be used only as a
reference.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING
■ Adjusting the LED Pointer d

Press .
Adjust the LED pointer if it indicates a point different → The Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer
than the actual needle drop point. Adjustment screen appears.
Before adjusting the LED pointer, mark the actual
needle drop point on the fabric to be embroidered,
a
and then hoop the fabric and attach the embroidery
frame.
Note
• As a default, some keys mentioned in the
following procedures appear in light gray
and are not available. To enable the keys for a LED pointer adjustment
specifying the settings, attach embroidery
foot “W+” with LED pointer to the machine.
The keys are enabled after the embroidery Note
foot is detected. • The specified setting is saved. This is useful
for positioning during continuous
a
Press . embroidering.
• For normal use, return the setting to “00”.
e
Use or to adjust the LED pointer so
b
Press .
that it indicates the actual needle drop
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
point.
f
Memo Press twice to return to the original
• When using the “Embroidery” or screen.
“Embroidery Edit”, touch to
directly access the Embroidery settings ■ Adjusting the Brightness of the LED
screen. Pointer
c a
Display page 10 of the Embroidery settings Follow the steps from a to d to display
screen. the embroidery foot with LED pointer
adjust screen.
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of
the LED pointer.
c
Press twice to return to the original
screen.
B-64
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
b
Insert the embroidery unit connection into
Attaching the Embroidery Unit the machine connection port. The spring
hinge on the connection port cover will
■ About the Embroidery Unit allow easy access to the port. Push lightly
B
CAUTION
on the connection port cover until the unit
clicks into place. 1
Getting Ready
• Do not move the machine with the embroidery
unit attached. The embroidery unit could fall
off and cause injury.
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,
injury may result.
• To avoid distorting your embroidery design, do
not touch the embroidery carriage and frame
when the machine is embroidering. a Embroidery unit connection
b Machine connection port
Note
Note
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches
• Be sure there is no gap between the
with the embroidery unit attached. Touch
embroidery unit and the sewing machine. If
and . The feed dog will there is a gap, the embroidery patterns will
not embroider with the correct registration.
automatically raise for utility and decorative • Do not push on the carriage when installing
stitching. the embroidery unit onto the machine.
• Be sure to turn off the power before Moving the carriage may damage the
attaching the embroidery unit. Otherwise, embroidery unit.
the machine may be damaged.
c
• Do not touch the inner connector of the Turn the main power to ON.
embroidery unit. The pins on the
embroidery unit connection may be → The following message will appear.
damaged.
d
• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery Press .
unit carriage or pick up the unit by the
carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit
may be damaged.
• Store the embroidery unit in the proper
storage case.
a
Turn the main power to OFF, and remove
the flat bed attachment.
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
Note
• Either “Embroidery” screen or “Embroidery
Edit” screen appears, depending on the
setting selected in the settings screen.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit c

Hold down the release button, and pull the
embroidery unit away from the machine.
a
Press either or , then press
.
→ The carriage will move to the removal position.
CAUTION
• Always remove the embroidery frame before
pressing . Otherwise, the frame may
strike the embroidery foot, and possibly cause
injury.
• The embroidery unit will not fit in the storage
case if this step is not done.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
Note
• Be sure to turn off the machine before a Release button
removing the embroidery unit, otherwise
damage to the machine may result.
CAUTION
• Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding
the release button compartment.
B-66
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE

ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE B
Using USB Media or Embroidery Memo

1
• USB media is widely used, however some
Card Reader/USB Card Writer
Getting Ready
USB media may not be usable with this
Module* machine. Please visit our website for more
details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
* If you have purchased the Palette Ver5 or later,
used, either directly plug the USB device
Palette Petite or Palette PTS, you can plug the
into the machine’s USB port or plug the
included USB card writer module into the machine
USB media Reader/Writer into the
as an embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
machine’s USB port.
Connecting the Machine to the

Computer
Using the included USB cable, the sewing machine
can be connected to your computer.
a USB port for mouse / media

b USB media
a USB port for computer

b USB cable connector
Note
a USB port for mouse / media • The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it
b Embroidery card Reader/USB card writer module*
is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force. Check the orientation of
Note the connector.
• Use only an embroidery card reader • For details on the position of the USB port
designed for this machine. Using an on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
unauthorized embroidery card reader may instruction manual for the corresponding
cause your machine to operate incorrectly. equipment.
• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from
the machine to an embroidery card inserted
into a connected USB card writer module.

■ Changing Pages
Using a USB Mouse If page numbers and a vertical scroll bar for
additional pages are displayed, click the left mouse
The USB mouse, connected to the sewing
button with the pointer on / or / to
machine, can be used to perform a variety of
operations in the screens. display the previous or next page.
If a mouse other than the optional USB mouse is

used, it may not perform as described in this
Instruction and Reference Guide.
Using the Dual Feed Foot

Dual feed foot enables you to have best fabric
control when sewing difficult fabrics that slip
a USB port for mouse / media easily, such as quilted fabrics, or fabrics that tend
b USB mouse to stick to the bottom of a presser foot, such as
vinyl, leather or synthetic leather.
Note
• Do not perform operations with the mouse Note
at the same time that you are touching the • When sewing with the dual feed foot, sew at
screen with your finger or the included medium to low speeds.
touch pen.
• A USB mouse can be connected or
disconnected at any time. Memo
• Only the left mouse button and its wheel • The dual feed foot can only be used with
can be used to perform operations. No straight or zigzag stitch patterns.
other buttons can be used. • When selecting stitches to be used with the
• The mouse pointer does not appear in the dual feed foot, only the stitches that can be
opening screen. used will be activated on the display.
• When sewing fabric that easily sticks
■ Clicking a Key together, a more attractive finish can be
achieved by basting the beginning of
When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears sewing.
on the screen. Move the mouse to position the
pointer over the desired key, and then click the left
mouse button.
Memo
• Double-clicking has no effect.
a
a Pointer
B-68
■ Attaching the Dual Feed Foot e

buttons.
a
Follow the steps from a to e of “Using
the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED → All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
B
1
Pointer” on page B-62. the previous screen is displayed.
■ Replacing the Sole Part of the Dual

b
Position the dual feed foot to the presser
foot bar by aligning the notch of the dual Feed Foot
Getting Ready
feed foot to the large screw. If you push down on the front part of the dual feed
foot, the sole part of the dual feed foot will snap off.
Side view
c
Hold the dual feed foot in place with your
right hand, then using the included
screwdriver securely tighten the large
screw.
Attach the sole by aligning the pins with the notches
and snap it into place.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw. If the screw is loose, the needle may
strike the presser foot and possibly cause a Pins
injury. b Notches
■ Using the Dual Feed Position Lever

d
Plug the connector of the dual feed foot
When the feed position lever is up, the black roller
into the jack on the back of your machine.
belt on the dual feed is not engaged.

d
When the feed position lever is down, the black Use or to increase or decrease the
roller belt on the dual feed is engaged. feeding of the top fabric.
* Select “00” for sewing in most cases.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too little,
causing the fabric to be longer than the bottom
fabric, press to increase the feed amount for the
top fabric.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too much,
causing the fabric to be shorter than the bottom
fabric, press to decrease the feed amount for the
top fabric.
Note
• Do not operate the lever while sewing.
■ Adjusting the Amount of Fabric

Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot
The dual feed mechanism pulls the top fabric
e
according to the set stitch length. With troublesome
fabrics, fine tune the set length, by changing the
dual feed foot adjustment in the settings screen.
Note
• As a default, some keys mentioned in the
following procedures appear in light gray
and are not available. To enable the keys for
specifying the settings, attach the dual feed
foot and connector to the machine. The
keys are enabled after the dual feed foot is
detected.
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
c
Display page 1 of the Sewing settings
screen.
B-70
B
1
Getting Ready

BBasic operations
Chapter 2
Sensor Functions
CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE

SENSOR PEN............................................................ 73
CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN ........................... 73

Using the Sensor Pen Holder ....................................................74
USING THE SENSOR PEN........................................ 75
Using the Sensor Pen ................................................................75
Important Information about Sensor Pen..................................75
Calibrating the Sensor Pen........................................................76
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH..... 78
Sensor Function Area................................................................78
Specifying the Guideline Marker Position With the Sensor Pen .....78
Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen .......80
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width and Stitch
Position .....................................................................................81
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point..............83
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN
“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE ...... 85
Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen.......85
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Edge ......... 86
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Center ...... 87

CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE SENSOR PEN
CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE

SENSOR PEN B
By using the sensor pen, you have the option of
four separate functions
2
Sensor Functions
• Setting the guideline as a reference for your
sewing position.
• Set the needle position of straight stitch.
• Adjust the width and “L/R SHIFT” position of a
zigzag stitch.
• Set the ending point of a stitch pattern sequence.
CAUTION a When specifying the end point of your sewing, this

function adjusts your pattern or stitch so that you
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
end up with a complete design.
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness. b It is easy to set the pattern width and position.
Note
• When the guideline or LED pointer does not
appear clearly, set the brightness of the
machine light dimmer to see them clearly.
Refer to “Using the Machine Setting Mode
Key” on page B-28.
CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN

When connecting the sensor pen to the machine, make sure that the arrow on the sensor pen connector
faces up, aligns with the arrow on the machine, and that the connector is firmly inserted into the jack.
CAUTION
• When connecting the sensor pen, make sure
that the arrow on the sensor pen connector
faces up and lines up with the arrow above the
sensor pen jack, otherwise the connector pins
will not align correctly and the connector will
be damaged.
• When connecting or disconnecting the sensor
pen, grab the connector, and then slowly push
it straight in or pull it straight out.
• When disconnecting the sensor pen from the
machine, do not pull on the cord, otherwise
a Sensor pen jack
the sensor pen may be damaged.
b Sensor pen connector

CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN
c
Set the sensor pen in the sensor pen holder
Using the Sensor Pen Holder with the pen tip pointing downward, and
then connect the sensor pen to the
When connecting the sensor pen to the machine, machine.
attach the sensor pen holder to keep the sensor
pen with the machine.
The right side of the holder can be used to hold the
touch pen.
Sensor pen holder
a
Using the point end of the cleaning brush or
the seam ripper point, remove the
protective cap covering the hole on the
right side of the machine.
→ Insert the point of the seam ripper or cleaning brush
into the hole in the protective cap, and then lightly
pull out the protective cap to remove it.
b
Firmly insert the sensor pen holder into the
hole where the protective cap was
removed.
B-74
USING THE SENSOR PEN

B
Using the Sensor Pen
Hold the sensor pen, and then touch the point to
Important Information about
Sensor Pen 2
be specified. When the tip of the sensor pen is
Sensor Functions
pushed in, the position information is sent to the The sensor pen emits the signal to the machine,
machine. and then the sensor pen receiver receives the
signal to specify the position.
When using the sensor pen, touch slowly and
gently for the definite operation.
a Sensor pen receiver inside the machine

b Signal is waved out from the sensor pen
1) Touch: Touch a point with the sensor pen, then

immediately lift up the pen.
2) Long touch: Touch a point with the sensor pen
CAUTION
• Do not insert any object into the sensor pen
and hold it down for at least one second to and the receiver, otherwise the machine may
activate the functions that you just selected. be damaged.
Note
• Once a point is touched with the sensor pen
and the entered information is applied in the
screen, perform the next operation.
IMPORTANT
• Do not put your hand, the fabric or any object
Repeatedly touching a point with the sensor
between the machine and the sensor pen,
pen may prevent the information from being
correctly read. otherwise the sensor pen receiver may not
receive the ultrasonic wave.
• Do not drag the sensor pen tip on the
machine, otherwise the sensor pen tip may • Do not use the machine close to any other unit
be chipped off. which produces ultrasonic wave or a vibration
• If there is any problem with the guideline sound, otherwise interference may occur.
marker, the sensor function may not
operate correctly.
Memo
• The sensor pen can be used to touch on the
screen as a touch pen.

e
First, touch the green dot marking on the
Calibrating the Sensor Pen needle plate cover using the sensor pen.
Before using the sensor pen for the first time be

sure to calibrate it to the screen. Doing so allows
the machine to learn the position you usually hold
a pen.
Hold the sensor pen at a comfortable angle and
then calibrate the machine according to the
procedure below.
Be sure to keep the sensor pen at the same angle
while calibrating the first and second points.
* Touch on the needle plate cover.
a
Press .
b
Press . a Needle plate cover
→ The General settings screen appears. * A beep will sound and the a will change to red. (If
you cannot hear the beep, check that the volume
c
Display page 6 of the General settings setting on page 4/10 of your settings is 1 or higher.)
screen. * Press to redo the first point by starting over
from step d.
d
Press after connecting the sensor
pen to the machine.
→ The Sensor Function Calibration screen appears.
B-76
f g
Second, touch the green dot on the Press to finish the calibration. To
embroidery unit or flat bed attachment repeat the calibration touch the first point
using the sensor pen. again using the sensor pen, and continue
with step f.
B
2
Sensor Functions
* Touch on the point in the illustrations.
* Press to return to the original screen without

finishing the calibration.
* Press to reset the calibration.
a Flat bed attachment

b Embroidery unit

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

Before using the sensor functions, carefully read “Utility Stitches” chapter to familiarize yourself with the
machine operations.
The sensor functions are performed using the sensor pen.
Sensor Function Area Memo

• There are borderline areas between setting
When using the sensor pen with utility stitches, the area and adjustment areas, which allow you
to set quickly to the most
operations may differ depending on the area to be decreased/increased value.
touched.
• The borderline areas are respectively 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) wide when
positioning the guideline marker, and 10
mm (approx. 3/8 inch) wide in other cases.
Specifying the Guideline Marker

Position With the Sensor Pen
The sewing position will be indicated by a red
guideline marker.
The position of the guideline marker can be
adjusted to your desired location.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Press .
a Center needle Sewing position for stitch patterns sewn

c
position with the center needle position Press .
b Setting area Area 3.5 mm to the left and right of a.
Touch this area with the sensor pen to
specify a position.
Area 7 mm, when positioning the
guideline marker.
c Adjustment area Touch: With each touch, the setting
(right) increases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine
adjustments to be made after touching
within b to specify a position.
Long touch: After touching b to specify
a position or adjusting the position by
touching within c or d, long touch to
apply the setting.
d Adjustment area Touch: With each touch, the setting
(left) decreases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine
adjustments to be made after touching
within b to specify a position.
Long touch: Apply the setting in the
same way as a long touch within c.
e The sensor pen touch range extends approximately 200 mm
(7-7/8 inches) toward you from the needle drop point and 130
mm (approx. 5 inches) to either side of the middle (center)
needle position. → The sensor functions screen appears.
B-78
d
Press .
Memo
• The position can be precisely adjusted by
touching the adjustment areas with the B
2
sensor pen.
• When using the sensor pen to specify the
guideline marker position, it may not be
possible to exactly specify the desired
location. In this case, use either of the
Sensor Functions
following operations to make fine
adjustments.
→ The guideline marker position setting screen appears
and the guideline marker flashes. - Touch an adjustment area with the sensor
pen to adjust the position in 0.5 mm
e
With the sensor pen, touch the location to increments.
be specified as the guideline marker - Adjust the position with the guideline
position. marker scale shown in step f.
→ The machine’s guideline marker moves to the

f
Press to apply the guideline marker
touched position and flashes.
position setting.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the guideline marker * The setting can also be applied by a long touch of
position setting screen. the sensor pen within the adjustment area.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
screen is updated according to the specified setting.
a Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor

pen.
Note
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press , and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
→ The stitch selection screen appears again, and the
setting in the guideline marker scale changes to the
setting specified with the sensor pen.
→ The guideline marker stops flashing.
Note
• If you set the needle drop position, the
stitch width or stitch position after
specifying the guideline marker position, the
guideline marker may move while setting.
The guideline marker moves back to the
specified position after the needle drop
position, stitch width or stitch position is set
and the original screen appears.

f
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
Specifying the Needle Drop be specified as the needle drop position.
Position With the Sensor Pen → The guideline marker moves to the touched position
and flashes.
a
Turn on the machine. touched position appears in the reference position
setting screen.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
b
Press . screen is updated according to the specified setting.
c
Select a stitch pattern.
d
Press . a
a Press to return the needle drop position to its

default setting.
b Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor
pen.
Note
is touched. Press , and then touch
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
e
Press .
Memo
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
• To change the setting, use the sensor pen
to touch the desired location for the
reference position.
→ The reference position setting screen appears, and
the red guideline marker flashes at the machine’s
sewing position.
Note
• If is not available, the sewing
reference position cannot be specified with
the selected stitch pattern. Select a different
stitch pattern.
B-80
g d
Press to apply the reference position Press .
setting.
* The setting can also be applied by long touching an
adjustment area with the sensor pen.
B
→ The needle moves to the specified position to start
sewing.
2
stitch width changes to the setting specified with the
Sensor Functions
sensor pen.
→ The guideline marker stops flashing.
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify

the Stitching Width and Stitch
Position → The sensor functions screen appears.
e
Press .
The zigzag width and “L/R SHIFT” value can be
specified.
→ The stitching width setting screen appears, and the

a Original stitching width/position guideline marker flashes at the present left side of
b Adjusted stitching width/position the stitch width.
a
Note
• If is not available, the stitching width
b
Press . cannot be specified with the selected stitch
pattern. Select a different stitch pattern.
c f
Select a stitch pattern. With the sensor pen, touch the first point
for the stitching width.
touched position appears in the stitching width
setting screen.
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position

and flashes.

i
Press to apply the second point of the
Note stitching width.
is touched. Press , and then touch → The needle moves to the specified position to start
within the sensor pen touch range. sewing.
stitch width and “L/R SHIFT” change according to
the settings specified with the sensor pen.
Memo
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
g
Press to apply the first point of the
stitching width.
h
With the sensor pen, touch the second
point for the stitching width. Note
→ The distance from the left reference line to the • With multiple patterns that have been
touched position appears in the stitching width combined, the specified stitching width is
setting screen. applied to the pattern with the largest stitch
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the width. With patterns other than combined
screen is updated according to the specified setting. patterns, the stitch width is adjusted to the
stitching width specified for the pattern with
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position
the largest stitch width.
and flashes.
• With multiple patterns that have been
combined, the settings specified for the
stitch width and “L/R SHIFT” in the stitch
selection screen are for the first pattern to
be sewn. The value may differ from the
stitch width setting.
• With twin needle sewing, the stitching width
is specified with the left needle as the
reference.
Note
• If the distance between the specified first
and second points is wider than the
maximum stitch width for the selected stitch
pattern, the second point cannot be
specified. Specify a location closer to the
first point.
• If the distance between the specified first
and second points is narrower than the
minimum stitch width for the selected stitch
pattern, the second point cannot be
specified. Specify a location further away
from the first point.
B-82
g
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify be specified as the sewing end point.
the Sewing End Point → The distance from the current needle position to the
touched location appears.
B
Before start sewing, test the pattern first from steps
a to f to see if the stitch can be used with this
function.
2
d
Sensor Functions
a
Turn on the machine. a
b
Press . b
c
c
Select a stitch pattern. a Press to erase the specified sewing end point.
b Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor
pen.
d
Start sewing, and then stop the machine c Press to select whether or not sewing is ended
with a complete pattern when a decorative stitch
when the desired sewing end point enters is selected.
the sensor pen touch range. d The distance from the current needle position to
the touched location appears.
e
Press . → See “Decorative Stitch End Setting Key” on
page B-84.
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
f
Press .
→ The sewing end point setting screen appears.
Note
• If is not available, the sewing end
point cannot be specified with the selected
stitch pattern. Select a different stitch
pattern.

Decorative Stitch End Setting Key

Note
The end of stitching is not adjusted.
• The displayed distance is not the length of a When the end point is reached, sewing
straight line connecting the current needle stops immediately, even if the stitch
position and the location touched with the pattern is not complete.
sensor pen. It is the length of a The length of the stitch pattern is
perpendicular intersection for the location adjusted so that sewing will stop at the
touched with the sensor pen and the sewing specified end point with a complete
line. pattern.
Note
• The decorative stitch end setting key is not
available with the following situations.
- When selecting the Utility Stitch patterns.
- When the decorative stitch end setting
key is grayed out.
- When specifying the sewing end point at
the point that needs adjustment more
a Displayed distance than 10% of the length of a pattern, to
finish a pattern completely.
h
Press to apply the sewing end point
is touched. Press , and then touch setting.
→ When a sewing end point setting is specified,
appears in the upper-left corner of the screen.
• When sewing with this setting, be sure to

feed the fabric straight, otherwise the actual
end point may be different from the point
you set.
sewing end point, the sewing end point may
be slightly different than the specified
location, depending on where the sewing
machine is stopped in order to specify the
setting.
Note
• If a different pattern is selected after the
sewing end point has been specified, the
end point setting is erased.
i
Start sewing again.
* The machine stops at the specified end point
automatically.
B-84
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN

“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE B
Before using the sensor functions, carefully read the procedure in “Embroidery” and “Embroidery Edit” to
familiarize yourself with the machine operations.
2
g
Press .
Sensor Functions
Specifying the Embroidering
Position With the Sensor Pen
By using the sensor pen, the embroidering position
can be adjusted to the desired location. This
function can be performed in either “Embroidery”
or “Embroidery Edit” mode, but the procedure
described below is performed in “Embroidery”
mode.
If the message “The carriage of the embroidery
unit will move. Keep your hands etc. away from
the carriage.” appears during the operation, ensure
safety, and then press .
a
b
Press .
→ When the extra large embroidery frame H 300 mm
× W 180 mm (H 12 inches × W 7 inches) is used,
the following message appears. Select the desired
c
Select the category for the pattern to be
embroidered. area and press .
d
In the pattern selection screen, press the
key for the pattern to be embroidered.
e
Press .
f
Hoop the fabric and attach the embroidery
frame to the machine.
→ Refer to “Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery
Frame” on page E-13 and “ATTACHING THE
EMBROIDERY FRAME” on page E-17.

h c
Press . With the sensor pen, touch the point on the
fabric corresponding to corner a in the
screen.
→ The embroidering position selection screen appears.
i
Select the method for positioning the a Square of pattern edge
embroidery pattern. b Pattern position
* To align the edge of the embroidery with a pattern
d
or mark on the fabric, select the edge. If the center of With the sensor pen, touch the point on the
the pattern to be embroidered is determined, select fabric corresponding to corner b in the
the center position. screen.
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position
by the Pattern Edge
a
From on the screen, press the edge
to be the reference for positioning.
b
Press . a Square of pattern edge
b Pattern position
e
Press to adjust the positions.
→ If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to
step i.
B-86
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position

by the Pattern Center
f
Press to move the LED pointer
B
a
2
on the fabric for adjusting the first position. Press in the following screen.
Sensor Functions
g b
Press to apply the setting. With the sensor pen, touch 2 points on the
fabric corresponding to the numbers in the
center of the embroidery pattern.
h
on the fabric for adjusting the second

position.
i
Press to apply the setting.
a Center line of the pattern

j
The preview in the sewing screen is updated b Pattern position
according to the specified embroidering → Specified point number turns into red.
position.
c
Press to adjust the positions.
k
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
→ If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to
embroidering. step g.

d
on the fabric for adjusting the first position.
e
f
on the fabric for adjusting the second

position.
g
h
The preview in the sewing screen is updated
according to the specified embroidering
position.
i
embroidering.
Note
embroidering position, it may not be
possible to exactly specify the desired
location. In this case, move the embroidery
frame to align the center of the pattern with
the location indicated by the LED pointer.
B-88
Sewing
This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other functions. It
provides details on basic sewing in addition to the more expressive features of the machine, from sewing
tubular pieces and buttonholes to sewing the character and decorative stitch patterns.
Page number starts with “S” in this section.
The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or regions.
Chapter1 Sewing Basics.......................................................... S-2

Chapter2 Utility Stitches ...................................................... S-20
Chapter3 Character/Decorative Stitches .............................. S-76
Chapter4 How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)................ S-104

S Sewing
Chapter 1
Sewing Basics
SEWING..................................................................... 3
Sewing a Stitch ...........................................................................3
■ Using the Foot Controller .......................................................... 4
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ...................................................5
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ...........................................5
Sewing Curves ............................................................................7
Changing Sewing Direction .......................................................7
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm or Less .............................. 7
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics ......................................................7
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot........................ 8
■ If the Fabric does not Feed......................................................... 8
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener ................................................8
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics ........................................................9
Sewing Stretch Fabrics................................................................9
STITCH SETTINGS ................................................... 10
Setting the Stitch Width............................................................10
Setting the Stitch Length ..........................................................10
Setting the “L/R SHIFT” ............................................................11
Setting the Thread Tension ......................................................12
■ Proper Thread Tension ........................................................... 12
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ....................................................... 12
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose ...................................................... 12
USEFUL FUNCTIONS .............................................. 13
Automatic Thread Cutting ........................................................13
Adjusting the Needle Drop Position with the Guideline Marker
(For models equipped with the guideline marker) ....................14
■ Adjusting the Guideline Marker Position.................................. 14
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the Guideline Marker.................... 14
Using the Knee Lifter ................................................................15
Pivoting.....................................................................................15
Automatic Fabric Sensor System
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) ............................................17
Needle Position – Stitch Placement ..........................................18
Locking the Screen ...................................................................18

SEWING
SEWING
S
CAUTION
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the needle while the machine is in operation. Keep your hands
1
away from moving parts while the machine is in operation.
Sewing Basics
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury.
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the stitch length setting before continuing sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.
d
Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold
Sewing a Stitch the fabric and thread in your left hand, and
rotate the handwheel to set the needle in
the sewing start position.
a
Turn the main power to ON and display the
utility stitches, and push the “Needle
Position” button to raise the needle.
b
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
Memo
• The black button on the left side of presser
foot “J” should be pressed only if the fabric
does not feed or when sewing thick seams
(see page S-8). Normally, you can sew
without pressing the black button.
e
Lower the presser foot.
→ The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD screen. * You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
c f
Install the presser foot (“CHANGING THE Adjust the sewing speed with the speed
PRESSER FOOT” of “Basic operations”). control slide.
* You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during
sewing.
CAUTION
• Always use the correct presser foot. If the
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
strike the presser foot and bend or break,
possibly resulting in injury. a Slow
Refer to page S-68 for presser foot
b Fast
recommendations.
Sewing S-3
SEWING
g
Note
sewing.
• When cutting thread thicker than #30, nylon
* Guide the fabric lightly by hand. monofilament thread, or other decorative
threads, use the thread cutter on the side of
the machine.
j
When the needle has stopped moving, raise
Memo the presser foot and remove the fabric.
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the
“Start/Stop” button. Memo
• This machine is equipped with a bobbin
thread sensor that warns you when the
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop bobbin thread is almost empty. When the
sewing. bobbin thread is nearly empty, the machine
automatically stops. However, if the
“Start/Stop” button is pressed, a few
stitches can be sewn. When the warning
displays, re-thread the machine
immediately.
■ Using the Foot Controller

You can also use the foot controller to start and stop
sewing.
i
Press the “Thread Cutter” button to trim
CAUTION
• Do not allow fabric pieces and dust to collect
the upper and lower threads.
in the foot controller. Doing so could cause a
fire or an electric shock.
Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the
“Start/Stop” button.
(For embroidery and sewing machine only)
→ The needle will return to the up position • The foot controller cannot be used when
automatically. embroidering.
• The foot controller can be used for sewing
CAUTION
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button after
utility and decorative stitches when the
embroidery unit is attached.
the threads have been cut. Doing so could

tangle the thread or break the needle and
damage the machine.
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle,
possibly resulting in damage.
S-4
SEWING
a
Insert the foot controller plug into its jack If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected on
on the machine. the screen, reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches) will be sewn automatically at the
beginning of sewing when the “Start/Stop” button S
1
is pressed. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew reverse
stitches or reinforcement stitches automatically at
the end of sewing.
Sewing Basics
a Foot controller
b Foot controller jack
b
Slowly depress the foot controller to start
sewing.
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
The operation performed when the button is
pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.
(Refer to the table in “Automatic Reinforcement
Memo Stitching” on page S-5.)
• The speed that is set using the sewing
speed controller is the foot controller’s
maximum sewing speed. Memo
• When you press the “Reinforcement Stitch”
button while sewing character/decorative
c
Release the foot controller to stop the
stitch pattern, you can end sewing with a
machine. full stitch instead of at a mid-point.
• The green light on the right of the
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches “Reinforcement Stitch” button lights up
while the machine is sewing a full motif, and
it automatically turns off when the sewing is
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally stopped.
necessary at the beginning and end of sewing. You
can use the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew
reverse/reinforcement stitches. Automatic Reinforcement
When you keep pressing the “Reinforcement
Stitch” button, the machine will sew reinforcement Stitching
stitch at that point 3 to 5 stitches, and then stop.
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the
automatic reinforcement stitching function before
sewing, and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing.
a
a “Reverse Stitch” button
b “Reinforcement Stitch” button
Sewing S-5
SEWING
d
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or
b
Press to set the automatic
“Reinforcement Stitch” button.
reinforcement stitching function.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
Memo
• To turn off the automatic reinforcement
stitching function, press again, so it
appears as .
→ The key will display as .
The operation performed when the button is
Memo pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.
• Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar Refer to the following table for details on the
tacks, require reinforcement stitches at the operation that is performed when the button is
beginning of sewing. If you select one of pressed.
these stitches, the machine will
automatically turn on this function (the key “Reverse Stitch” “Reinforcement
appears as when the stitch is button Stitch” button
selected).
Machine starts Machine starts
+
c
sewing the stitches sewing the stitches
Set the fabric in the start position and start and only sews reverse and sews 3 - 5
sewing. stitches while holding reinforcement
the “Reverse Stitch” stitches while holding
button. the “Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
+ sewing the stitches sewing the stitches
and only sews reverse and sews 3 - 5
stitches while holding reinforcement
the “Reverse Stitch” stitches while holding
button. the “Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
Machine sews Machine sews
+ reverse stitches at the reverse stitches at the
beginning and end of beginning and
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches) sewing. reinforcement
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches stitches at the end of
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue sewing.
sewing. Machine sews Machine sews
+ reinforcement reinforcement
Memo stitches at the stitches at the
beginning and reverse beginning and end of
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to stitches at the end of sewing.
pause sewing, press it again to continue. sewing.
The machine will not sew
reverse/reinforcement stitches again.
S-6
SEWING
“Reverse Stitch” “Reinforcement ■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm

button Stitch” button or Less
Baste the corner before sewing, and then, after S
1
+ sewing and then sews sewing at the
changing the sewing direction at the corner, pull the
reinforcement beginning, then basting thread toward the back while sewing.
stitches while holding completes the pattern
the “Reverse Stitch” and sews
button. reinforcement
Sewing Basics
stitches at the end of
sewing.
Machine sews Machine sews
+ reinforcement reinforcement
stitches at the stitches at the
beginning and sews beginning, then
reinforcement completes the pattern
stitches when the and sews
“Reverse Stitch” reinforcement
button is touched. stitches at the end of a 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
sewing.
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics

Sewing Curves
The sewing machine can sew fabrics up to 6 mm
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with (approx. 1/4 inch) thick. If the thickness of a seam
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the causes sewing to occur at an angle, help guide the
curve. fabric by hand and sew on the downward slope.
Changing Sewing Direction

CAUTION
• Do not forcefully push fabrics more than
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric,
and press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to raise 6 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) thick through the
the presser foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn sewing machine. This may cause the needle to
the fabric so that you can sew in the new break and cause injury.
direction. Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to • Thicker fabrics require a larger needle
lower the presser foot and start sewing. (“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of “Basic
operations”).
The pivot setting is useful when changing the

sewing direction. When the machine is stopped at
the corner of the fabric, the machine stops with the
needle in the fabric and the presser foot is
automatically raised so the fabric can easily be
rotated (“Pivoting” on page S-15).
Sewing S-7
SEWING
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the c

Release the black button.
Presser Foot
If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are
sewing heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric
which do not fit easily under the presser foot, use
the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot to its
highest position. The fabric will now fit under the
presser foot.
→ The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to
be fed.
Memo
• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the
foot will return to its normal position.
• When “Automatic Fabric Sensor System”
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) in the
machine settings screen is set to “ON”, the
thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected by the internal sensor so the fabric
can be fed smoothly for best sewing results.
(see page S-17 for details.)
Memo
• You cannot use the presser foot lever after
the presser foot has been raised using the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button.
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener
■ If the Fabric does not Feed

If the fabric does not feed when starting to sew or
when sewing thick seams, press the black button on
CAUTION
• Do not use adhesive backed hook-and-loop
the left side of presser foot “J”.
fastener designed for sewing. If the adhesive
sticks to the needle or the bobbin hook race, it
a
Raise the presser foot.
may cause malfunction.
• If the hook-and-loop fastener is sewn with a
b
While keeping the black button on the left fine needle (65/9-75/11), the needle may bend
side of presser foot “J” pressed in, press the or break.
“Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower the
presser foot.
Note
• Before starting to sew, baste the fabric and
hook-and-loop fastener together.
Make sure that the needle passes through the

hook-and-loop fastener by rotating the handwheel
and lower the needle into the hook-and-loop
fastener before sewing. Sew the edge of the
hook-and-loop fastener at a slow speed.
If the needle does not pass through the
hook-and-loop fastener, replace the needle with
the needle for thick fabrics (“Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” of “Basic operations”).
a Edge of the hook-and-loop fastener
S-8
SEWING
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics

Place thin paper or tear away embroidery
S
stabilizer under thin fabrics to make sewing easier.
Gently tear off the paper or the stabilizer after
sewing.
1
Sewing Basics
a Thin paper
Sewing Stretch Fabrics

First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then
sew without stretching the fabric.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by
using thread for knits or a stretch stitch.
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch
fabrics, decrease the pressure of the
presser foot (“Using the Machine Setting
Mode Key” of “Basic operations”).
a Basting stitching
Sewing S-9
STITCH SETTINGS
STITCH SETTINGS
When you select a stitch, your machine automatically selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length,
“L/R SHIFT”, and upper thread tension. However, if needed, you can change any of the individual
settings.
Note
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed (refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68).
• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch without saving stitch setting changes (“Saving Your
Stitch Settings” on page S-22), the stitch settings will return to their default settings.
Press to widen the zigzag stitch pattern width.

Setting the Stitch Width
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the zigzag stitch pattern width.
Memo
• For an alternate method of changing the
stitch width using the speed controller, see
page S-39. → The value in the display gets bigger.
Example: Memo
• Press after pressing to return to the
Press to narrow the zigzag stitch pattern
original setting.
width.
Note
• After adjusting the stitch width, slowly
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle does not touch the presser foot. If
the needle hits the presser foot, the needle
may bend or break.
Setting the Stitch Length
→ The value in the display gets smaller.

the stitch pattern length.
S-10
STITCH SETTINGS
Example:
Setting the “L/R SHIFT”
Press to shorten the stitch length.
S
the placement of the zigzag stitch pattern by
moving it left and right. 1
Sewing Basics
Example:
Press to shift the pattern to the left.
→ The value in the display gets smaller.

Press to lengthen the stitch length.
→ The value in the display appears with a minus sign.

Press to shift the pattern to the right side of the
left needle position.
→ The value in the display gets bigger.
Memo
• Press to check changes made to the
stitch.
original setting.
CAUTION
• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen
the stitch length and continue sewing. Do not → The value in the display appears with a plus sign.
continue sewing without lengthening the stitch
length. Otherwise, the needle may break and Memo
cause injury. • Press after pressing to return to the
original setting.
Note
• After adjusting the “L/R SHIFT”, slowly
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle does not touch the presser foot. If
the needle hits the presser foot, the needle
may bend or break.
Sewing S-11
STITCH SETTINGS
Press , to loosen the upper thread.

Setting the Thread Tension
Memo
You may need to change the thread tension,
• When you finish sewing, remove the bobbin
depending on the fabric and thread being used. cover and then make sure that the thread is
Follow the steps below to make any necessary shown as below. If the thread is not shown
changes. as below, the thread is not inserted through
the tension-adjusting spring of the bobbin
case correctly. Reinsert the thread
correctly. For details, refer to “Setting the
Bobbin” of “Basic operations”.
■ Proper Thread Tension

The upper thread and the bobbin thread should
cross near the center of the fabric. Only the upper
thread should be visible from the right side of the
fabric, and only the bobbin thread should be visible
from the wrong side of the fabric.
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose

If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may appear to
a Wrong side
be too loose. In this case, refer to “Upper
b Surface Threading” of “Basic operations” and
c Upper thread rethread the upper thread.
d Bobbin thread
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight

If the bobbin thread is visible on the right side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may appear to
be too tight. In this case, refer to “Setting
the Bobbin” of “Basic operations” and
rethread the bobbin thread.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c Wrong side
d Locks appear on wrong side of fabric
Press , to tighten the upper thread.
Memo
original setting.
a Bobbin thread
b Upper thread
c Surface
d Locks appear on surface of fabric
S-12
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
S
c
1
Set the fabric in the start position and start
Automatic Thread Cutting sewing.
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the

automatic thread cutting function before sewing,
Sewing Basics
and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing, and trim the threads at the end
of sewing. This function is useful when sewing
buttonholes and bar tacks.
a
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
b
Press to set the automatic thread sewing.
cutting function.
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to
pause sewing, press the same button again
to continue. The beginning
reverse/reinforcement stitches will not be
sewn again.
d
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button.
→ The key will display as . a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches), then trim the thread.
Memo
• To turn off the automatic thread cutting
function, press again, so it appears
as .
Sewing S-13
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
c
Press again to stop using the guideline
Adjusting the Needle Drop
marker.
Position with the Guideline
Marker (For models equipped
with the guideline marker) ■ Adjusting the Guideline Marker
Position
The red guideline marker indicates the sewing If the guideline marker indicates the position
position on the fabric. incorrectly in the center needle position, adjust the
initial position in the settings screen.
You can adjust the sewing position by moving the
guideline marker while checking the guideline
a
Press to display “Guideline Marker
marker on the fabric. Adjustment” in the settings screen.
b
Display settings screen.
CAUTION
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness.
a
Press to display the guideline marker.
c
Press .
→ The “Guideline Marker Adjustment” screen appears.
d
Use or to adjust the guideline
marker position.
a b
a Press to move the guideline marker to the left

→ The guideline marker scale appears. b Press to move the guideline marker to the right
* Depending on the setting of “Initial Position” in the
settings screen, the initial needle drop position is
e
scaled as either 0.0 mm or 3.5 mm.
screen.
b
Use or to move the needle drop
position.
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the
→ Adjust the position from 10.5 mm (3/8 inch) to the
right of the left needle to -3.5 mm (-1/8 inch) to the Guideline Marker
left of the left needle.
a
Follow steps from a to c to display the
“Guideline Marker Adjustment” screen.
S-14
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
b
Use your knee to move the knee lifter bar to
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of
the right in order to raise the presser foot.
the guideline marker. Release the knee lifter to lower the presser
→ Set the brightness of the guideline marker from “1” foot.
S
1
for a dim marker, to “5” for the brightest marker, on
the fabric.
Sewing Basics
c
screen.
CAUTION
• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee
Using the Knee Lifter lifter during sewing. If the knee lifter is pushed
during machine operation, the needle may
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the break or the thread tension may loosen.
presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands
free to handle the fabric.
Memo
a
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the • When the presser foot is in the up position,
notches in the knee lifter slot on the front of move the knee lifter to the far right and then
the machine. Insert the knee lifter bar as far release to return the presser foot to the
down position.
as possible.
Pivoting
If the pivot setting is selected, the machine stops
with the needle lowered (in the fabric) and the
presser foot is automatically raised to an
appropriate height when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed. When the “Start/Stop” button is pressed
again, the presser foot is automatically lowered
and sewing continues. This function is useful for
stopping the machine to rotate the fabric.
CAUTION
• Only change position of the knee lifter handle
when knee lifter is not on the machine, CAUTION
otherwise the presser foot will go up, and then • When the pivot setting is selected, the
the knee lifter may damage the mounting slot machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is
on front of the machine. pressed or the foot controller is pressed down
even if the presser foot has been raised. Be
sure to keep your hands and other items away
Note from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.
• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the
mounting slot as far as possible, it may
come out during use.
Sewing S-15
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
a
Select a stitch.
Memo
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
b
height of the presser foot when sewing is Press to select the pivot setting.
stopped can be changed according to the
type of fabric being sewn. Press to
display “Pivoting Height” in the settings
screen. Press or to select one of
the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm or 7.5
mm). To raise the presser foot further,
increase the setting. (Normally, 3.2 mm is
set.)
Note
• The “Needle Position - UP/DOWN” in the
settings screen, must be set in the down → The key appears as .
c
position for the pivot function to be Place the fabric under the presser foot with
used. When “Needle Position - UP/DOWN” the needle at the starting point of the
stitching, and then press the “Start/Stop”
is set in the raised position, appears
as light gray and cannot be used. button. The machine will begin sewing.
• The pivot function can only be used with
stitches where presser foot J or N is
indicated in the upper-left corner of the
screen. If any other stitch is selected,
appears as light gray and is not available.
• Use the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
make sure the presser foot is lowered, and
then press the “Start/Stop” button to
continue sewing.
• If the pivot setting is selected, and
beside “Presser Foot Height” in the settings
Memo
screen are not available and the setting
cannot be changed. • If you press the “Start/Stop” button to
pause sewing, press it again to continue,
reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
will not be sewn.
S-16
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine at the point where the sewing Automatic Fabric Sensor System
direction changes.
(Automatic Presser Foot S
1
Pressure)
The thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected and the presser foot pressure is
Sewing Basics
automatically adjusted with an internal sensor
while sewing, to insure that your fabric is fed
smoothly. The fabric sensor system works
continuously while sewing. This function is useful
for sewing over thick seams (see page S-8), or
→ The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and
quilting (see page S-35).
the presser foot is raised.
e
Rotate the fabric, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button.
→ The presser foot is automatically lowered, and

sewing continues.
a
Press to display “Automatic Fabric
Sensor System” in the settings screen.
b
Set “Automatic Fabric Sensor System” to
“ON”.
c
Sewing S-17
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Needle Position – Stitch Locking the Screen

Placement
If the screen is locked before starting to sew, the
various settings such as the stitch width and stitch
When the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is length are locked and cannot be changed. This
on, the needle will be partially lowered for precise prevents screen settings from accidentally being
stitch placement and then press the “Needle changed or the machine from being stopped while
Position” button again to lower the needle large pieces of fabric or projects are being sewn.
completely. Each press of the “Needle Position” The screen can be locked when sewing utility
button changes the needle to the next position. stitches and character decorative stitches.
When the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is
a
turned off, each press of the “Needle Position” Select a stitch pattern.
button simply raises and then lowers the needle.
a Pointing needle mode is “ON”
b
b Pointing needle mode is “OFF” If necessary, adjust any settings such as the
stitch width and stitch length.
c
Press to lock the screen settings.
→ The key appears as .
d
Sew your project.
* When the needle is nearly lowered by pressing the
e
“Needle Position” button, the feed dogs are When you are finished sewing, press
lowered. At this time, the fabric can be shifted to
finely adjust the needle drop position. again to unlock the screen settings.
CAUTION
• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the
screen by pressing . While the screen is

locked, no other key can be operated.
a
Press to display “Needle Position – • The settings are unlocked when the machine is
Stitch Placement” in the settings screen. turned off and on.
b
Set “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” to
“ON” or “OFF”.
c
S-18
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
S
1
Sewing Basics
Sewing S-19
S Sewing
Chapter 2
Utility Stitches
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ............................... 21 Darning .................................................................................... 58

Bar Tacks ................................................................................. 59
Selecting a Stitch ......................................................................21
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics .......................................................61
■ Using the Mirror Image Key .................................................... 21 Button Sewing ......................................................................... 61
■ Using the Image Key ................................................................ 22
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons..........................................................62
Saving Your Stitch Settings ......................................................22
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button ..............................................62
■ Saving Settings ......................................................................... 22 Eyelet ...................................................................................... 62
■ Retrieving Saved Settings ......................................................... 23
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch) ... 63
SEWING THE STITCHES .......................................... 24 Zipper Insertion ...................................................................... 64
Straight Stitches ........................................................................24 ■ Centered Zipper .......................................................................64
■ Inserting a Side Zipper .............................................................65
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left or Middle Needle Position
Stitches Only) ......................................................................... 25 STITCH SETTING CHART ........................................ 68
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle Plate or Bobbin
Cover (with Mark).................................................................... 26
■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and the Straight
Stitch Foot................................................................................ 26
■ Basting ..................................................................................... 28
Dart Seam .................................................................................28
Gathering..................................................................................29
Flat Fell Seam............................................................................29
Pintuck......................................................................................30
Zigzag Stitches .........................................................................31
■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ........................................ 31
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ............................................. 31
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt) .................................................... 32
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag Stitch) .................................... 32
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ................... 32
Elastic Zigzag Stitches ..............................................................33
■ Tape Attaching ........................................................................ 33
■ Overcasting ............................................................................. 33
Overcasting .............................................................................33
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G” ....................................... 33
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J” ......................................... 34
Quilting ...................................................................................35
■ Piecing .................................................................................... 36
■ Piecing Using the 1/4" Quilting Foot with Guide
(optional with some models) .................................................... 37
■ Appliqué ................................................................................. 38
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches ..................................................... 39
■ Free Motion Quilting ............................................................... 40
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo Quilting Foot “E”
(optional with some models) .................................................... 43
Blind Hem Stitches ..................................................................45
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of the Hem Fold ................... 47
■ If the Needle does not Catch the Hem Fold ............................. 47
Appliqué ..................................................................................48
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves ............................................................ 48
■ Appliqué Corners ..................................................................... 49
Shelltuck Stitches .....................................................................49
Scallop Stitches ........................................................................50
Crazy Quilting ..........................................................................50
Smocking Stitches ....................................................................51
Fagoting ...................................................................................52
Tape or Elastic Attaching .........................................................52
Heirloom .................................................................................53
■ Hemstitching (1) ...................................................................... 53
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1)) ......................................... 54
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2)) ......................................... 54
One-step Buttonholes ..............................................................55
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics ............................................................ 57
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do Not Fit into the Button
Holder Plate ............................................................................ 58

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

S
■ Using the Mirror Image Key
Selecting a Stitch
There are 5 categories of Utility Stitches.
Depending on the type of utility stitch you select,
you may be able to sew a horizontal mirror image of
the stitch.
2
Utility Stitches
a
Turn the main power to ON and display the If is lit when you select a stitch, it will be
possible to make a mirror image of the stitch.
utility stitches.
→ Either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight

Note
stitch (Middle)” is selected, depending on the setting • If is light gray after you select a stitch,
selected in the settings screen.
you cannot create a horizontal mirror image
of the selected stitch due to the type of
b
Use to select the stitch or type of presser foot recommended
(this is true of buttonholes, multi-directional
category you want. sewing, and others).
* Press to view previous page. Press to create a horizontal mirror image of the
selected stitch.
The key will display as .
a
b
a Preview of the selected stitch

b Stitch selection screen
c Percentage size of view
c
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
Sewing S-21
■ Using the Image Key

You can display an image of the selected stitch. You
Saving Your Stitch Settings
can check and change the colors of the image of the
screen. The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch
length, thread tension, automatic thread cutting,
a
Press . automatic reinforcement stitching, etc., are preset
→ An image of the selected stitch is displayed.
in the machine for each stitch. However, if you
have specific settings that you wish to reuse later
for a stitch, you can change the settings so that
b
Press to change the thread color of they can be saved for that stitch. Five sets of
the stitch on the screen. settings can be saved for a single stitch.
* Press to display an enlarged image of the

■ Saving Settings
stitch.
a
Select a stitch. (Example: )
b
Specify your preferred settings.
a Stitch screen
Memo
• The color changes every time you press
c
. Press .
→ The memory function screen appears.

Note
d
• If stitches are wider or larger than display, Press .
press darkened arrows to move the stitch
pattern for better visibility.
c
→ The settings are saved. Touch and the

original screen automatically appears.
Memo
• If you try to save settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,
the message “The pockets are full. Delete a
pattern.” will appear. Close the message
and delete a setting referring to page S-23.
S-22
■ Retrieving Saved Settings

Memo
a
Select a stitch. • To save new settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch, S
Memo
• When a stitch is selected, the last settings
retrieved are displayed. The last settings
press in the memory function screen.
Press the numbered key of the setting to be
deleted. Press and then . Press
2
retrieved are retained even if the machine
Utility Stitches
was turned off or a different stitch was , , and then . The new
selected. setting will be saved in place of the recently
deleted setting.
• You can delete all the saved settings by
b
Press .
pressing .
→ The memory function screen appears.
c
Press .
d
Press the numbered key of the settings to be
retrieved.

retrieving settings.
a Numbered keys
e
Press .
→ The selected settings are retrieved. Touch

and the original screen automatically appears.
Sewing S-23
SEWING THE STITCHES
SEWING THE STITCHES
Straight Stitches Memo

• Refer to “Sewing Reinforcement
See page S-68 for the detailed information of Stitches” on page S-5 for the detailed
information of reverse stitches and
stitches. reinforcement stitches.
a
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Select a stitch.
Straight stitch (Left)
Straight stitch (Left)
Straight stitch (Middle)
Straight stitch (Middle)
Triple stretch stitch
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
Stem stitch
* Attach presser foot “N” when you select .
c
Decorative stitch
Hold the thread tail and fabric with your
left hand, and rotate the handwheel with
your right hand to insert the needle into the
Basting stitch
fabric.
a Left needle position

b Middle needle position a Sewing start position
d
Lower the presser foot, and hold the
“Reverse Stitch” or “Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew 3-4 stitches.
→ The machine sews reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches).
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
S-24
SEWING THE STITCHES
e ■ Changing the Needle Position (Left

Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew
forward. or Middle Needle Position Stitches
Only) S
2
When you select left or middle needle position
stitches, you can use and in the stitch
width display to change the position of the needle.
Match the distance from the right edge of the presser
Utility Stitches
foot to the needle with the stitch width, then align
the edge of the presser foot with the edge of the
fabric during sewing for an attractive finish.
a Reverse stitches
→ The machine will begin sewing slowly.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
a Stitch width
f
When sewing is completed, hold the
“Reverse Stitch” or “Reinforcement Stitch” Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches
button to sew 3-4 reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) at the end of the
seam.
g
After sewing, press the “Thread Cutter” 12.0 mm 8.5 mm 6.5 mm 5.0 mm
button to trim the threads. (approx. (approx. (approx. (approx.
1/2 inch) 11/32 1/4 inch) 3/16 inch)
inch)
Memo
• When the automatic thread cutting and
automatic reinforcement stitch keys on the
screen are selected, reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) will be sewn
automatically at the beginning of sewing
when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed.
Press the “Reverse Stitch” or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew
reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
and trim the thread automatically at the end
of sewing.
Sewing S-25
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on ■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle
the Needle Plate or Bobbin Cover Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot
(with Mark) The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch
While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the foot can only be used for straight stitches (middle
16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch) mark on the needle plate needle position stitches). Use the straight stitch
or bobbin cover (with mark) depending on the needle plate and the straight stitch foot when sewing
needle position (left or middle (center) needle thin fabrics or when sewing small pieces which tend
position stitches only). to sink into the hole of the regular needle plate
during sewing. The straight stitch foot is perfect to
For stitches with a left needle position reduce puckering on lightweight fabrics. The small
(Stitch width: 0.0 mm) opening on the foot provides support for the fabric
as the needle travels through the fabric.
a 2.25 mm (1/8 inch)

b 4.25 mm (3/16 inch)
c 6.25 mm (1/4 inch)
d 8.5 mm (5/16 inch)
a Seam
b
c
Presser foot
Centimeters CAUTION
• Always use the straight stitch foot in
d Inches
e Needle plate combination with the straight stitch needle
plate.
f 16 mm (5/8 inch)
a
For stitches with a middle (center) needle position Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
(Stitch width: 3.5 mm) the needle and turn the main power to OFF
or press .
b
Remove the needle and the presser foot
holder (“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of
“Basic operations”).
c
Remove the flat bed attachment.
d
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.
a Seam
b Presser foot
c Inches
d Bobbin cover (with mark) a Needle plate cover
e 16 mm (5/8 inch)
S-26
SEWING THE STITCHES
e h
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out. Insert the bobbin case in its original
position, and then attach the needle plate
cover.
S
i
2
After reinstalling the needle plate cover,
select any of the straight stitches.
Memo
Utility Stitches
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
a Bobbin case all straight stitches become middle needle
position stitches. You cannot change the
f
Use the disc-shaped screwdriver included needle position using the width display.
with the machine to unscrew and remove • Always secure the needle plate before
the regular needle plate. inserting the bobbin case into its original
position.
• “L/R SHIFT” does not work when straight
stitch needle plate is on the machine.
CAUTION
• Selecting other stitches will cause an error
message to be displayed.
g
Set the straight stitch needle plate in place
• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you
and use the disc-shaped screwdriver to (counterclockwise) before sewing and make
tighten the plate. sure that the needle is not contacting the
straight stitch foot and straight stitch needle
plate.
j
Insert needle and attach the straight stitch
foot.
a Round hole
Note
• Align the two screw holes on the needle
plate with the two holes on the machine.
Use the disc-shaped screwdriver included
with the machine to secure the screws in
the needle plate.
a Notch
b Pin
k
Start sewing.
* After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot, and reinstall
the regular needle plate, the needle plate cover and
the presser foot “J”.
Memo
• To prevent puckering on fine fabrics, use a
fine needle, size 75/11, and a short stitch
length. For heavier fabrics, use a heavier
needle, size 90/14, and longer stitches.
Sewing S-27
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Basting
Dart Seam
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
a
b
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew
reinforcement stitches, then continue
b
Sew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the
sewing.
dart and then sew from the wide end to the
other end without stretching the fabric.
* If automatic reinforcement stitching is preset, a
reinforcement stitch will automatically be sewn at
the beginning of sewing.
Memo
• When you use the basting stitch for
gathering, do not use a reinforcement stitch
at the beginning; you should lift the presser
foot, rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), pull up the bobbin
thread and pull a length of top and bobbin a Basting
thread out from the rear of the machine.
c
• You can set the stitch length between 5 mm Cut the thread at the end leaving 50 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx. (approx. 1-15/16 inches), and then tie both
1-3/16 inches) ends together.
* Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.
a Between 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm

(approx. 1-3/16 inches)
c
Sew while keeping the fabric straight.
d
Insert the ends of the thread into the dart
with a hand sewing needle.
d
End the basting with reinforcement stitches.
S-28
SEWING THE STITCHES
e d
Iron the dart to one side so that it is flat. Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel to
the seam line, then trim excess thread
leaving 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
S
2
Utility Stitches
a Seam line
Gathering b 10 mm to 15 mm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser desired amount of gather, then tie the
foot “J”. threads.
f
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and the thread tension to
approximately 2.0 (weaker tension).
* If you press after pressing
g
and then , the stitch length will be set Sew on the seam line and remove the
automatically to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and the basting stitch.
thread tension will be automatically set to 2.0.
Flat Fell Seam

c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches) (see page
B-47). Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges
neatly.
a
b
Sew the finish line, then cut half of the seam
allowance from the side on which the flat
fell seam will lie.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
a Upper thread of sewing. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew a
b Bobbin thread
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
Sewing S-29
SEWING THE STITCHES
reinforcement stitch and trim the thread Finished flat fell seam
automatically at the end of sewing.
a Surface
a About 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch) Pintuck

b Wrong side
a
Mark along the folds on the wrong side of
c
Spread the fabric out along the finish line.
the fabric.
a Finish line
a Wrong side
b Wrong side
b
Turn the fabric and iron the folded parts
d
Lay both seam allowances on the side of the
shorter seam (cut seam) and iron them. only.
a Surface
a Wrong side
e
Fold the longer seam allowance around the
c
Select and attach presser foot “I”.
shorter one, and sew the edge of the fold.
a Wrong side
S-30
SEWING THE STITCHES
d a
Sew a straight stitch along the fold. Select a stitch.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic

reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement S
2
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
of sewing. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew a
reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
Utility Stitches
b
a Width for pintuck ■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch)

b Wrong side
Sew the overcasting along the edge of the fabric
c Surface
while positioning the right-hand side needle drop
point just outside the edge of the fabric.
e
Iron the folds in the same direction.
Zigzag Stitches a Needle drop position
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch)

Zigzag stitches are useful for overcasting, Attach the appliqué material using a temporary
appliqué, patchwork, and many other spray adhesive or basting, and then sew it.
applications. * Sew a zigzag stitch while positioning the right-hand
Select a stitch, and attach presser foot “J”. side needle drop point just outside the edge of the
fabric.
See page S-5 for the detailed information of
reverse stitches and reinforcement stitches.
stitches.

Zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Sewing S-31
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt) c

Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into
Turn back the desired width of fabric and position it
place, making sure that the gimp thread can
over the lower fabric, then sew so that the stitch be fed freely.
bridges both pieces of fabric. * Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the
thread.
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag

d
Stitch) Set the zigzag width from 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch - 3/32 inch).
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine
stitch. Sew slowly, keeping the seams parallel with
e
Attach presser foot “N”.
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
f
Position the fabric right side up on top of
the cord and place the cord to the rear of
the machine under the presser foot.
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a

Zigzag Stitch)
a Fabric (right side)
a
Remove the bobbin cover from the machine
b Gimp thread
(“Setting the Bobbin” of “Basic
g
operations”). Lower the presser foot and start sewing to
make a decorative finish.
b
Thread the gimp thread through the hole in
the cord guide bobbin cover from top to
bottom. Position the thread in the notch at
the back of the cord guide bobbin cover.
a Notch
b Gimp thread
S-32
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Overcasting
Elastic Zigzag Stitches Use this stitch to sew overcasting on the edge of
Use elastic zigzag stitches for tape attaching,

stretch fabrics. Sew the overcasting along the edge
of the fabric while positioning the right-hand side
S
overcasting, darning, or a wide variety of other
uses.
needle drop point just outside the edge of the fabric.
2
stitches.
Utility Stitches
2 steps elastic zigzag
3 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting
a
Select a stitch.
Use for the edge of seams in skirts or trousers, and

the edge of all cuttings. Use presser foot “G”,
presser foot “J”, or the optional side cutter
attachment depending on the kind of overcasting
stitch you select.
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G”
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
b
Overcasting stitch
■ Tape Attaching
Stretch the tape flat. While stretching the tape flat,
sew the tape to the fabric.
a Tape
Sewing S-33
SEWING THE STITCHES
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “G”.
CAUTION
• After the stitch width is adjusted, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may break and cause injury.
a The needle should not touch the center bar

• If the presser foot is raised to its highest level,
the needle may strike the presser foot.
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J”

stitches.

Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
b
Lower the presser foot so that the presser
foot guide is set flush against the edge of the
fabric. Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
Single diamond overcast
Single diamond overcast
c
Sew along the presser foot guide.
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
a Guide
S-34
SEWING THE STITCHES
b
Sew with the needle dropping slightly off Presser foot
the edge of the fabric. Stitch Stitch name
S
2
Stem stitch
Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch
Utility Stitches
Zigzag stitch (Right)
a Needle drop position Zigzag stitch (Left)
Note
• Use the “L/R SHIFT” setting for fine tuning 2 steps elastic zigzag
the placement of the stitch. Be sure to sew
trial stitches using the same conditions as
the real sewing. 3 steps elastic zigzag
Quilting Quilting appliqué stitch
You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily

with this machine. When making a quilt, you will Shell tuck edge
find it convenient to use the knee lifter and foot
controller to free your hands for other tasks
(“Using the Foot Controller” on page S-4 and /or Blanket stitch
“Using the Knee Lifter” on page S-15).
The 30 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-30 and
the utility stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated on Quilting stippling
their key are useful for quilting.
The “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display
indicates that these stitches are intended for (“Q”)
Overcasting stitch
quilting and (“P”) piecing.
stitches. Tape attaching
Presser foot
Stitch Stitch name Serpentine stitch
Piecing stitch (Middle)

Feather stitch
Piecing stitch (Right)

Fagoting cross stitch
Piecing stitch (Left)

Couching stitch
Hand-look quilting (Middle)

Patchwork double overlock
stitch
Basting stitch
(Middle) Smocking stitch
Sewing S-35
SEWING THE STITCHES
Presser foot
Note
Stitch Stitch name
• The width range of stitch setting is only
available in the Quilting stitch “Q” quilting
Rick-rack stitch category.
■ Piecing
Decorative stitch Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called
piecing. When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make
sure the seam allowance is 6.5 mm (approx.
Decorative stitch 1/4 inch).
a
Select or and attach presser foot
Hemstitching
“J”.
b
Hemstitching Align the edge of the fabric with the edge of
the presser foot, and start sewing.
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
Single diamond
overcast along the right edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 5.50 mm

Overcasting stitch
(approx. 7/32 inch).
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecing stitch (Left)
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

Hand-look quilting * To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch selected, the width should be set to 1.50 mm
(approx. 1/32 inch).
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stippling
Memo
• When a stitch pattern in the Quilting a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
Stitches category (Q-02 through Q-30) is
selected, a finer stitch width can be set than * To change the needle position, use or in
is available with stitch patterns in other the width display.
categories.
For example: Stitch Q-03 has 57 needle
positions and stitch Q-19 has 29 width
selections.
S-36
SEWING THE STITCHES
Creating an accurate seam allowance

Memo Use the mark on the foot to begin, end, or pivot 1/4
• Using a straight stitch (middle needle inch from edge of fabric.
position) makes it easier to sew smoothly
a
S
2
(see page S-24).
• For models equipped with the guideline e
marker:
In the case Q-01(center, at width 3.5 mm) is b
selected, if the guideline marker is set at
Utility Stitches
10.0 mm (3.5 mm plus 6.5 mm, close to 1/4
inch), you can sew piecing with referring the
guideline marker.
c
■ Piecing Using the 1/4" Quilting Foot

with Guide (optional with some e
models) d
This quilting foot can sew an accurate 1/4 inch or a Align this mark with edge of fabric to begin.
1/8 inch seam allowance. b Beginning of stitching
It can be used for piecing together a quilt or for c End of stitching
topstitching. d Opposite edge of fabric to end or pivot
e 1/4 inch
a
Press , and then attach the 1/4” quilting
Memo
foot with guide. • For details on pivoting, refer to “Pivoting”
on page S-15.
Topstitching quilting, 1/8 inch

Sew with the edge of the fabric aligned with the left
side of the presser foot toe.
a
a
a Guide
b
Use the guide and marks on the presser foot
to sew accurate seam allowances.
Piecing a 1/4 inch seam allowance
b
Sew keeping the edge of the fabrics against the guide.
c
b a Surface of fabric
b Seam
c 1/8 inch
a
a Guide
b 1/4 inch
Memo
• For accurate fabric placement, refer to
“Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the
Needle Plate or Bobbin Cover (with Mark)”
on page S-26.
Sewing S-37
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Appliqué e
Use the quilting appliqué stitch to attach
the appliqué. Sew around the edge while
a
Trace the pattern onto the appliqué fabric dropping the needle as close to the edge as
and then cut around it, leaving a 3 mm to possible.
5 mm (approx. 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch) seam
allowance.
a Seam allowance: 3 mm to 5 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch)
b
Place a piece of stabilizer cut to the finished
size of the appliqué design onto the fabric,
and then fold over the seam margin using
an iron. Clip curves when necessary.
c
Turn the appliqué over, and attach the
a Appliqué
stabilizer with basting pins or a basting
b Needle drop position
stitch.
CAUTION
• Be careful that the needle does not strike a
basting pin during sewing. Striking a pin can
cause the needle to break, resulting in injury.
d
S-38
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
You can use the appliqué technique to attach Set the “Width Control” to “ON”.
appliqué designs like the three pictured below.
S
2
Utility Stitches
a Dresden plate
b Stained glass
Memo
c Sunbonnet sue
• You can use the speed control slide to
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches adjust the stitch width. Use the foot
controller to adjust the sewing speed.
For better fabric control, use the foot controller to
sew with satin stitches. Set the speed control slide to
f
control the stitch width to make subtle changes in Press .
the stitch width during sewing.
→ The display will return to the original screen.
a
Attach the foot controller (see page S-4).
g
Start sewing.
* You can adjust the stitch width during sewing by
b
Select and attach presser foot “J”. moving the sewing speed controller. Slide the lever
to the left, and the stitch width becomes narrower.
Slide it to the right, the stitch width becomes wider.
c
Press in the length display to shorten The size of the width changes equally on both sides
of the middle needle position.
the stitch length.
a narrower
b wider
Example: Changing the width
h
Memo When you are finished sewing, set the
• The setting will vary according to the kind of “Width Control” back to “OFF”.
fabric and the thickness of the thread, but a
length of 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm (approx.
1/64 inch to 1/32 inch) is best for satin
stitches.
d
Press to use the speed control slide
to control the stitch width.
Sewing S-39
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Free Motion Quilting

Memo
With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
lowered by pressing , so that the fabric can be detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
moved freely in any direction. in the machine settings screen. Press
In this mode, the presser foot is raised to the
to display “Free Motion Foot
necessary height for free motion sewing.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and Height” of the settings screen. Press or
sewing at a consistent speed. You can adjust the to change the height that the quilting
sewing speed with the speed control slide on the foot is raised above the fabric. Increase the
machine.
setting by pressing , when sewing fluffy
or thick fabric, so that the fabric passes
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
easily under the quilting foot. Decrease the
height by pressing , when sewing thinner
fabrics.
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
Using free motion open toe quilting foot “O”

The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used
for free motion quilting with zigzag or decorative
stitches or for free motion quilting of straight stitches • In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
on fabric with an uneven thickness. Various stitches may be necessary to adjust the upper
can be sewn using free motion open toe quilting foot thread tension (see page S-12). Test with a
“O”. For details on the stitches that can be used, sample piece of quilting fabric.
refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on
a
page S-68. Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
With free motion quilting, control the feeding speed

of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing speed,
the needle may break or other damage may result.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised

to the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
b
Select a stitch.
c
Remove the presser foot holder.
S-40
SEWING THE STITCHES
d g
Attach free motion open toe quilting foot Press to cancel the free motion sewing
“O” by positioning the pin of the quilting mode.
foot above the needle clamp screw and
aligning the lower-left of the quilting foot
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
S
and the presser bar.
Memo
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
2
results. The technique requires practice.
Utility Stitches
Using free motion quilting foot “C” (optional with
some models)
Use the free motion quilting foot “C” with straight
stitch needle plate for free motion sewing.
a pin
b Needle clamp screw
c Presser bar
Note Free motion quilting foot “C”

• Make sure that the quilting foot is not
slanted.
CAUTION
e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your • When using free motion quilting foot “C”, be
right hand, and tighten the presser foot sure to use the straight stitch needle plate and
holder screw using the disc-shaped sew with the needle in middle (center) needle
screwdriver with your left hand. position. If the needle is moved to any position
other than the middle (center) needle position,
the needle may break, which may result in
injuries.
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
a Presser foot holder screw detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
CAUTION to display “Free Motion Foot

Height” of the settings screen. Press or
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle to change the height that the quilting
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend foot is raised above the fabric. Increase the
or break. setting by pressing , when sewing fluffy
or thick fabric, so that the fabric passes
f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut, easily under the quilting foot. Decrease the
and then move the fabric at a consistent height by pressing , when sewing thinner
pace in order to sew uniform stitches fabrics.
roughly 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm (approx.
1/16 inch - 3/32 inch) in length.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it

may be necessary to adjust the upper
a Stitch thread tension.Test with a sample piece of
fabric that is similar to your chosen fabric.
Sewing S-41
SEWING THE STITCHES
a
Attach the straight stitch needle plate (see → The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to
page S-26).
the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
a Round hole
Memo
• Notice this needle plate has a round hole for
the needle.
b
Select or .
c
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
a Free motion quilting foot “C”

→ When stitch Q-01 or 1-30 is selected, free motion
quilting foot “C” is indicated in the upper-left corner
of the screen.
d
Attach free motion quilting foot “C” at the
front with the presser foot holder screw
aligned with the notch in the quilting foot.
a Presser foot holder screw

b Notch
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is attached
properly and not slanted.
e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the screwdriver with
your left hand.
a Presser foot holder screw
S-42
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion

CAUTION Echo Quilting Foot “E” (optional
with some models) S
2
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend motif is called echo quilting. The quilting lines,
or break. which appear as ripples echoing away from the
motif, are the distinguishing characteristic of this
f
Utility Stitches
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut, quilting style. Use the free motion echo quilting foot
and then move the fabric at a consistent “E” for echo quilting. Using the measurement on the
pace in order to sew uniform stitches presser foot as a guide, sew around the motif at a
roughly 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm (approx. fixed interval. We recommend attaching the foot
controller and sewing at a consistent speed.
1/16 inch - 3/32 inch) in length.
Free motion echo quilting foot “E” measurement
a Stitch
g
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
h
After sewing, make sure to remove the
straight stitch needle plate and presser foot
“C”, and reinstall the regular needle plate
and the needle plate cover.
b 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
Note
• Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” can
also be used with the straight stitch needle
plate. We recommend using free motion CAUTION
open toe quilting foot “O” with free motion • With free motion quilting, control the feeding
sewing of fabrics of uneven thicknesses. speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
• When using the straight stitch needle plate, If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
all straight stitches become middle needle speed, the needle may break or other damage
position stitches. You cannot change the may result.
needle position using the width display.
Memo
• Normally, the feed dogs are raised for
regular sewing.
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.
Sewing S-43
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Attach the adapter (“Attaching the Presser
Memo Foot with the Included Adapter” of “Basic
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor operations”).
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
d
quilting foot is raised to the height specified Attach the free motion echo quilting foot
in the machine settings screen. Press “E” on the left side of the adapter with the
to display “Free Motion Foot holes in the quilting foot and adapter
Height” of the settings screen (see page aligned.
S-15). Press or to change the height
that the quilting foot is raised above the
fabric. To create a greater distance between
the foot and needle plate for sewing thick,
fluffy fabrics, increase the setting by
pressing . To create a lesser distance
between foot and needle plate for sewing
thin fabrics, decrease the setting by
pressing .
e
Tighten the screw with the included
screwdriver.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it

may be necessary to adjust the upper
thread tension (see page S-12). Test with a
sample piece of quilting fabric.
a
Select .
b
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
CAUTION
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to

the necessary height, then the feed dogs are lowered
for free motion sewing.
S-44
SEWING THE STITCHES
f
Using the measurement on the quilting foot
as a guide, sew around the motif. Blind Hem Stitches
Secure the bottoms of skirts and pants with a blind
S
hem. Two stitches are available for blind hem
stitching. 2
Utility Stitches
Blind hem stitch
Blind hem stitch stretch
Memo
• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too
small to slide onto the arm or the length is
too short, the fabric will not feed and
desired results may not be achieved.
a
Turn the skirt or pants wrong side out.
2
1
Finished project 3
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Bottom side
b
Fold the fabric along the desired edge of the
hem, and press.
b Right side of Fabric
2
4 c Edge of fabric
1 d
g
Desired edge of hem
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode. 1 3 2
<Thick fabric>
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you 2
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs. 1
<Normal fabric>
3
<Seen from the side>
Sewing S-45
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Use a chalk to mark on the fabric about 5
g
mm (3/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric, Select or .
and then baste it.
5 6 b Right side of fabric
3
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
4 e 5 mm (3/16 inch)
1 2
f Basting
1 2
<Thick fabric>
1 2
<Normal fabric>
d h
Fold back the fabric inside along the Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
basting. free-arm.
i
a Wrong side of fabric Slide the item that you wish to sew onto the
b Right side of fabric free arm, make sure that the fabric feeds
c Edge of fabric correctly, and then start sewing.
3 5 d Desired edge of hem
4 6
e 5 mm (3/16 inch)
f Basting
1 2
g Basting point
1
7 <Thick fabric>
1
<Normal fabric>

a Free arm
e
Unfold the edge of fabric, and position the
j
Position the fabric with the edge of the
fabric with the wrong side facing up.
folded hem against the guide of the presser
a Wrong side of fabric foot, and then lower the presser foot lever.
4 c Edge of fabric
3
1 d Desired edge of hem
1 e Basting point
6 1 f Basting
1
5
<Thick fabric>
2
1
<Normal fabric>
b Fold of hem
c Guide
f
Attach blind hem foot “R”.
S-46
SEWING THE STITCHES
k ■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of

Adjust the stitch width until the needle
slightly catches the fold of the hem. the Hem Fold
The needle is too far to the left. S
Press to decrease the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem. 2
Utility Stitches
a Needle drop point <Thick fabric>
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then change the stitch width.
<Stitch width>
<Normal fabric>
a Thick fabric
b Normal fabric 1 2
Memo
• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left
needle drop point does not catch the fold. If a Wrong side of fabric
the needle catches too much of the fold, the b Right side of fabric
fabric cannot be unfolded and the seam
appearing on the right side of the fabric will
be very large, leaving an unattractive finish. ■ If the Needle does not Catch the
If you experience either of these cases,
follow the instructions below to solve the Hem Fold
problem. The needle is too far to the right.
Press to increase the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
Sewing S-47
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
<Normal fabric> Attach presser foot “J”. Check that the
needle drops slightly off the edge of the
appliqué, then start sewing.

l
Sew with the fold of the hem against the
presser foot guide.
a Appliqué material
m
Remove the basting stitching and reverse
the fabric.
1 2

a Needle drop position
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves
Appliqué Stop the machine with the needle in the fabric
outside the appliqué. Raise the presser foot and turn
the fabric a little bit at a time while sewing for an
a
Use a temporary spray adhesive, fabric glue attractive finish to the seam.
or a basting stitch to attach the appliqué to
the fabric.
* This will keep the fabric from moving during
sewing.
a Appliqué
b Fabric glue
b
Select or .
* Adjust the stitch length and width to correspond to

the appliqué shape, size, and quality of material (see
page S-10).
Memo
S-48
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Appliqué Corners c
To make rows of shell tuck stitches, fold the
Stop the machine with the needle in the right
fabric in half along the bias.
position of the outside (or inside) corner of the
appliqué. Raise the presser foot and pivot the fabric
S
to align the fabric edge. Lower the presser foot and
continue stitching. 2
Utility Stitches
Memo
• Use a thin fabric.
d
Attach presser foot “J”. Set the needle drop
point slightly off the edge of the fabric, and
start sewing.
a Outside corner
b Inside corner
Memo
• Placing a lightweight tear away stabilizer
beneath the stitching area will improve the
stitch placement along the edge of the
appliqué fabric.
Shelltuck Stitches
Shelltuck stitches give an attractive appearance of
a Needle drop position
shells along the curve of a collar. This stitch
pattern can be used for edging the neckline or
sleeves of dresses and blouses.
a
Select .
Memo
b
Increase the upper thread tension for an
attractive scallop finish to the shelltuck
stitches (see page S-12).
Memo
• If the upper thread tension is too weak, the
shelltuck stitches will not scallop.
Sewing S-49
SEWING THE STITCHES
e c
Unfold the fabric, and iron the tucks to one Trim along the seam, making sure not to cut
side. the stitches.
Memo Memo
• To make shell tucks at the edge of a collar • Use a seam sealant to secure the edges of
or neckline, follow the pattern’s instructions the scallop stitches.
and then use this stitch to make a
decorative finish on the collar or neckline.
Crazy Quilting
Scallop Stitches For a decorative look called “Crazy Quilting”, the
following stitches can be sewn on top of a pressed
This wave-shaped satin stitch is called the scallop seam allowance.
stitch. Use this stitch to decorate the edges of
a
blouse collars and handkerchiefs or use it as a hem Select a straight stitch and attach presser
accent. foot “J”.
b
Memo With the right sides facing each other, sew
• A temporary spray adhesive may be two pieces of fabric together, and then
necessary for lightweight fabrics. Test sew press open the seam allowance.
the fabric before sewing a project.
a
Select .
Memo
b
Attach presser foot “N”. Sew scallop
stitches along the edge of the fabric.
* Do not sew directly on the edge of the fabric. a Straight stitch
b Seam margins
d Wrong side
S-50
SEWING THE STITCHES
c e
Select a stitch for top stitching. Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, and then smooth
the gathers by ironing them.
S
d
Place the fabric right side up in the
machine, and center the presser foot over
the seam when sewing.
2
Utility Stitches
f
Select or .
a Right side of fabric

Memo
Smocking Stitches “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
g
Use smocking stitches for decorative sewing on Sew the spaces between the straight seams.
clothes, etc.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
3/16 inch) and loosen the upper thread
tension to approximately 2.0 (see “Setting
the Stitch Length” on page S-10 and
“Setting the Thread Tension” on page S-12).
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
h
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches). Pull out the straight stitch threads.
d
Sew the seams, leaving approximately
10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch) between the
seams, then trim excess thread, leaving
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
a Approximately 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
Sewing S-51
SEWING THE STITCHES
Fagoting Tape or Elastic Attaching

When there is a space between two fabrics with
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
thread sewn over the space to join the fabrics
foot “J”.
together, it is called fagoting. Use this stitch when
sewing blouses or children’s clothes.
b
3/16 inch), and loosen the upper thread
a
Baste two pieces of fabric onto thin paper,
leaving a space of 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) tension to 2.0 (see “Setting the Stitch
between the fabrics. Length” on page S-10 and “Setting the
Thread Tension” on page S-12).
* If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper
or water-soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.
Memo
• Be sure that neither automatic
reinforcement nor automatic thread
cutting is selected.
c
Sew two rows of straight stitches on the
right side of the fabric, then pull the bobbin
thread to create the necessary gather.

b Paper
c Basting stitches
b
Select or .
Memo
Memo
c
Attach presser foot “J”. Align the center of • Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
the presser foot with the middle of the and pull up the bobbin thread. Holding the
space between the fabrics and begin top and bobbin thread, pull a length of
sewing. thread out from the rear of the machine. (Be
sure that the presser foot is raised.)
d
Place the tape over the gather, and hold it
in place with basting pins.
a Basting stitches
Memo
• Use a thick thread.
a Tape
d
When sewing is finished, gently tear the
paper away.
S-52
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Select or . Heirloom
■ Hemstitching (1)
S
2
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the Use for sewing tablecloths, decorative hems, and
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68. decorative stitching on shirt fronts.
f
Sew over the tape (or elastic). Memo
Utility Stitches
• Use a light to medium weight homespun
fabric with a little stiffness.
a
Insert a type 130/705H, size 100/16 Wing
needle.
* This specialty sewing needle is not furnished with
your machine. Must be purchased separately.
CAUTION
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be
used. Thread the wing needle by hand, from
front to back. Using the “Automatic
Threading” button may result in damage to the
machine.
• A more attractive finish can be obtained if you
use a “130/705H Wing” needle when sewing
these patterns. If using a wing needle and the
stitch width has been set manually, check that
the needle will not touch the presser foot by
carefully rotating the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before starting to sew.
CAUTION b
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “N”.
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The * Select any stitch between 3-01 and 3-22.
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
g
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Memo
Sewing S-53
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Start sewing.
d
Press to create a mirror image of the
stitch.
Example: Illustration of finished product
e
Match beginning needle drop points on the
opposite edge of the open area to keep the
stitching symmetrical.
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))
a
Pull out several threads from one area on a
piece of fabric to open the area. ■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))
* Pull out 5 or 6 threads to leave a 3 mm
a
(approx. 1/8 inch) area open. Pull out several threads from both sides of
the 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) area which
are not yet open.
* Pull out four threads, leave five threads, and then
pull out four threads. The width of five threads is
approximately 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less.
Memo
• Loosely woven fabrics work best for this.
b
Select . a Approx. 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less
b Four threads (pull out)
c Five threads (leave)
Memo
b
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68. Select .
c
Attach presser foot “N”. With the right side
of the fabric facing up, sew one edge of the Memo
open area. • For details on each stitch, refer to the
S-54
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Sew the decorative stitch in the center of Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
the five threads created above. Bound buttonhole
S
Keyhole buttonhole
2
Tapered keyhole buttonhole
Utility Stitches
Keyhole buttonhole
Memo
• A wing needle can be used for Hemstitching
One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of
(3). the presser foot to the back, as shown below.
One-step Buttonholes
With one-step buttonholes, you can make
buttonholes appropriate to the size of your button.
stitches.

Narrow rounded buttonhole
Wide round ended

buttonhole
Tapered round ended

buttonhole
Round ended buttonhole
Round ended buttonhole
a Reinforcement stitching
Round double ended

buttonhole
Narrow squared buttonhole
Wide squared buttonhole
Stretch buttonhole
Heirloom buttonhole
Sewing S-55
SEWING THE STITCHES
a
Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach
buttonhole foot “A”. Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
b
Mark the position and length of the foot.
buttonhole on the fabric. • Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown
2 in the illustration, making sure that there is
no gap behind the part of the foot marked
“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as
1 far as possible, the buttonhole will not be
sewn at the correct size.
a Marks on fabric
e
b Buttonhole sewing Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
Memo buttonhole foot.
• The maximum buttonhole length is about
28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter +
thickness of the button).
c
Pull out the button holder plate on the
presser foot, and insert the button that will
be put through the buttonhole. Then tighten
the button holder plate around the button.
a Buttonhole lever
a Button holder plate

a Metal bracket
Memo
f
• The size of the buttonhole is determined by Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
the size of the button in the button holder and then start sewing.
plate. * Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
d
Align the presser foot with the mark on the
fabric, and lower the presser foot.
A
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
a Mark on the fabric stops.
b Marks on the presser foot
S-56
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics

Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
When sewing on stretch fabric with or ,
S
2
automatically cut after the reinforcement sew the buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
a
(for example, because it is too thick), Hook the gimp thread onto the back of
increase the stitch length setting. presser foot “A”. Insert the ends into the
grooves at the front of the presser foot, and
Utility Stitches
g
Insert a pin along the inside of one of the
then temporarily tie them there.
bar tacks, and then insert the seam ripper
into the center of the buttonhole and cut
towards the pin.
a Upper thread
b
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
a Basting pin
b Seam ripper
CAUTION
• When using the seam ripper to open the
buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in
the path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and
cause injury. Do not use the seam ripper in any
other way than how it is intended.
Memo Memo
• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet • Set the width of the satin stitches to the
punch to make a hole in the rounded end of width of the gimp thread, and set the
the buttonhole. Then insert a pin along the buttonhole width to be 2-3 times the width
inside of one of the bar tacks, insert a seam of the gimp thread.
ripper into the hole made with the eyelet
c
punch, and cut towards the pin. Once sewing is completed, gently pull the
gimp thread to remove any slack, and trim
off any excess.
a Eyelet punch
b Basting pin
Memo
• After using the seam ripper to cut open the
threads over the buttonhole, trim off the
threads.
Sewing S-57
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do

Not Fit into the Button Holder Plate Darning
Use the markings on the presser foot scale to set the
Use darning stitches for mending and other
size of the buttonhole. One mark on the presser foot
applications.
scale equals 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
Add the button diameter and thickness together, and See page S-68 for the detailed information of
then set the plate at the calculated value. stitches.

Darning
Darning
Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the

presser foot to the back as shown below.
a Presser foot scale

b Button holder plate
c Completed measurement of diameter + thickness
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Memo
• For example, for a button with a diameter of
15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch) and a thickness
of 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch), the scale
should be set at 25 mm (approx. 1 inch).
a Reinforcement stitches
a 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
a
b 15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch) Select a stitch, and attach buttonhole foot
“A”.
b
Set the scale to the desired length of the
darning.

b Completed length measurement
c Width 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Memo
• The maximum length for darning is 28 mm
(approx. 1-1/16 inches).
S-58
SEWING THE STITCHES
c e
Check that the needle drops at the desired Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
position and lower the presser foot, making and then press the “Start/Stop” button to
sure the upper thread passes underneath start the machine.
the buttonhole foot.
S
2
Utility Stitches
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
Note stops.
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot. Memo
• Set the presser foot so that there is no gap • If automatic thread cutting is turned on
behind the section marked with an “A” (the before you start sewing, both threads are
shaded area in the illustration below). If automatically cut after the reinforcement
there is a gap, the size of the darning will stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
not be correct. (for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
Bar Tacks
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject
to strain, such as pocket corners.
d
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the See page S-68 for the detailed information of
buttonhole foot. stitches.

Bar tack
a
Select .
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A” and set the
scale to the length of the bar tack you wish
a Buttonhole lever
to sew.
a Metal bracket

b Completed length measurement
c 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Sewing S-59
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
Memo positioned behind the metal bracket on the
• Bar tacks can be between 5 mm (approx. buttonhole foot.
3/16 inch) and 28 mm (approx. 1-1/16
inches). Bar tacks are usually between 5
mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 10 mm (approx.
3/8 inch).
c
Set the fabric so that the pocket moves
toward you during sewing.
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser a Metal bracket
foot.
f
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
foot backward as far as possible as shown begin sewing.
in the illustration, making sure that there is
no gap behind the part of the foot marked
“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as
far as possible, the bar tack will not be sewn
to the correct size.
d
Check the first needle drop point and lower → When sewing is completed, the machine will sew
reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.
the presser foot.
a 2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch)
S-60
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics c

Attach button sewing foot “M”, slide the
Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside
button along the metal plate and into the
presser foot, and lower the presser foot.
the fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot
and allow for easier and even feeding.
S
2
Utility Stitches
a Button
a Presser foot b Metal plate
b Thick paper
d
c Fabric Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the needle
Memo goes into each hole correctly.
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on * If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
before you start sewing, both threads are side, adjust the stitch width.
automatically cut after the reinforcement * To attach the button more securely, repeat the
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed process.
(for example, because it is too thick),
e
increase the stitch length setting. Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
start sewing.
→ The machine stops automatically when sewing is
Button Sewing finished.
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using

the machine. CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
stitches. button during sewing. The needle may break
and cause injury.
f
Button sewing From the wrong side of the fabric, pull the
end of the bobbin thread to pull the upper
thread through to the wrong side of the
fabric. Tie the two thread ends together and
cut the threads.
Note
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting
function when sewing buttons. Otherwise,
you will lose the thread ends.
a
Select .
→ The feed dogs are lowered automatically.
b
Raise the presser foot.
g
After the button is attached, select another
stitch and rotate the handwheel toward you
Sewing S-61
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons

Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the
Eyelet
presser foot and move the fabric so that the needle
goes into the next two holes, and sew them in the Use this stitch for making belt holes and other
same way. similar applications.
stitches.

Eyelet
a
Select .
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button

b
Use or in either the stitch width
a
Pull the shank lever toward you before
display or the stitch length display to
sewing.
choose the size of the eyelet.
* Actual size
a Shank lever a Large 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
b Medium 6 mm (approx. 15/64 inch)
b
Pull the two ends of the upper thread
c Small 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
between the button and the fabric, wind
c
them around the shank, and then tie them Attach monogramming foot “N”, then
firmly together. rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check the needle
drop position.
c
Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from the
beginning and end of sewing together on
the wrong side of the fabric.
Note
• When sewing is completed, be sure to a Needle drop position
select the other stitch and rotate the
d
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
to raise the feed dogs.
→ When sewing is finished, the machine sews
d
Cut off any excess thread. reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.
Note
• If the stitch pattern comes out poorly, make
adjustments to “SEWING STITCH
PATTERNS” on page S-81.
S-62
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in the
b
center of the stitching. Select and attach monogramming foot
“N”. S
2
Utility Stitches
Multi-directional Sewing
Memo
(Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch) • For details on each stitch, refer to the
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or
c
emblems to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc. Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing
start point, and sew seam “1” as shown.
a
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
free-arm.
Memo a Start Point

• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the
free-arm, and then sew in the order shown
d
Select and sew seam “2” as shown.
in the illustration.
* The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by
hand to keep sewing straight.
Sewing S-63
SEWING THE STITCHES
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
e
Select and sew seam “3” as shown. stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch (see page S-28) and sew to
the top of the fabric.
→ The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.
a Basting stitches
f
Select and sew seam “4” as shown. b Reverse stitches
c End of zipper opening
d Wrong side
c
Press the seam allowance open and attach
the zipper with a basting stitch in the
middle of each side of the zipper tape.
→ The seam will be connected to the starting point of

seam 1.
Zipper Insertion
■ Centered Zipper a Basting stitches
b Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
c Wrong side
d
Remove presser foot “J”. Align the right
a
Select .
side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with the
presser foot holder, and attach the zipper
Memo foot.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
S-64
SEWING THE STITCHES
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
CAUTION a basting stitch and sew to the top of the
fabric.
S
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
2
Utility Stitches
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
e
Topstitch 7 mm to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch
to 3/8 inch) from the seamed edge of the
fabric, then remove the basting.
a Reverse stitches
b Wrong side of fabric
c Basting stitches
d End of zipper opening
c
Press the seam allowance open and align
the folded hem along the teeth of the
zipper, while maintaining 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) of sewing space.
CAUTION
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
■ Inserting a Side Zipper a Zipper pull tab

Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses. b Wrong side of fabric
c Zipper teeth
a
Select . d End of zipper opening
e 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
d
Remove presser foot “J”.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
Sewing S-65
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Align the right side of the pin in zipper foot
“I” with the presser foot holder, and attach
the presser foot. CAUTION
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
i
Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and
sew a basting stitch.
a Right
b Left
CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
a Front of the skirt (wrong side of fabric)
b Basting stitches
straight stitch, middle needle position is c Front of the skirt (right side of fabric)
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
d Back of the skirt (right side of fabric)
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
j
does not strike the presser foot. If another Remove the presser foot, and reattach it so
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the that the left side of the pin is attached to the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and presser foot holder.
possibly causing injury.
* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
f
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx. should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle
1/8 inch) margin. should drop on the left side of the presser foot.
g
Starting from the end of the zipper opening,
sew to a point about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, then
stop the machine.
h
Pull down the zipper slider, then continue
sewing to the edge of the fabric.
a Right
b Left
k
Set the fabric so that the left edge of the
presser foot touches the edge of the zipper
teeth.
l
a 50 mm (approx. 2 inches) Sew reverse stitches at the top of the
b 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch) zipper, then continue sewing.
m
Stop sewing about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, leave
the needle in the fabric, and remove the
basting stitches.
S-66
SEWING THE STITCHES
n
Open the zipper and sew the rest of the
seam.
S
2
Utility Stitches
a Basting stitches
b 7 mm to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch)
c Reverse stitches
d 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
Sewing S-67
STITCH SETTING CHART

The following chart shows information for each utility stitch concerning applications, stitch lengths, stitch
widths, and whether or not the twin needle mode can be used.
Stitch width Stitch length

Presser foot
[mm (inch)] [mm (inch)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Straight stitch General sewing, gather,

(Left) pintuck, etc. 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

(Left) pintuck, etc. 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

(Middle) pintuck, etc. 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

(Middle) pintuck, etc. 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Triple stretch General sewing for

stitch reinforcement and decorative 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
topstitching (0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing

and decorative applications 1.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(1/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Decorative Decorative stitching, top

stitch stitching 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Basting stitch Basting 5 - 30

0.0 0.0 - 7.0 20
(3/16 - NO
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/4)
1-3/16)
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16) (J)
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.

3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16) (J)
Zigzag stitch Start from right needle

(Right) position, zigzag sew at left. 3.5 2.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.3 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Zigzag stitch Start from left needle position,

(Left) zigzag sew at right. 3.5 2.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.3 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
2 steps elastic Overcasting (medium weight

zigzag and stretch fabrics), tape and 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 5.0 OK
elastic (3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
3 steps elastic Overcasting (medium,

zigzag heavyweight and stretch 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 5.0 OK
fabrics), tape and elastic (3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Overcasting Reinforcing of light and

stitch medium weight fabrics 3.5 2.5 - 5.0 2.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
S-68

Presser foot
needle
Overcasting Reinforcing of heavyweight

stitch fabric 5.0 2.5 - 5.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (3/32 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Overcasting Reinforcing of medium,

stitch heavyweight and easily friable 5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
fabrics or decorative stitching. (3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Overcasting Reinforced seaming of stretch

stitch fabric 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Overcasting Reinforcing of medium stretch

stitch fabric and heavyweight fabric, 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
decorative stitching (3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Overcasting Reinforcement of stretch

stitch fabric or decorative stitching 4.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Overcasting Stretch knit seam

stitch 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Single diamond Reinforcement and seaming

overcast stretch fabric 6.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Single diamond Reinforcement of stretch

overcast fabric 6.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.8 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
With side cutter Straight stitch while cutting

fabrics 0.0 0.0 - 2.5 2.5 0.2 - 5.0
NO
(0) (0 - 3/32) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
With side cutter Zigzag stitch while cutting

fabrics 3.5 3.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.0 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/16) (0 - 3/16)
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while

cutting fabrics 3.5 3.5 - 5.0 2.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

cutting fabrics 5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)

cutting fabrics 5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm

(Right) (approx. 1/4 inch) left seam 5.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
allowance (7/32) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork

(Middle) 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
— — NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm

(Left) (approx. 1/4 inch) left seam 1.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
allowance (1/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hand-look Quilting stitch made to look

quilting like hand quilting stitch 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Quilting Zigzag stitch for quilting and

appliqué zigzag sewing on appliqué quilt 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 5.0
NO
stitch pieces (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16)
Sewing S-69

Presser foot
needle
Quilting Quilting stitch for invisible

appliqué stitch appliqué or attaching binding 1.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.8 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Quilting Background quilting

stippling 7.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/4) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Blind hem stitch Hemming woven fabrics

2.0 0.4 - 5.0
00 3← - →3 NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Blind hem stitch Hemming stretch fabric

stretch 2.0 0.4 - 5.0
00 3← - →3 NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket

stitch 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on

fabrics 4.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Satin scallop Decorating collar of blouse,

stitch edge of handkerchief 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.1 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Scallop stitch Decorating collar of blouse,

edge of handkerchief 7.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/4) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Patchwork join Patchwork stitches, decorative

stitch stitching 4.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.2 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Patchwork Patchwork stitches, decorative

double overlock stitching 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
stitch (3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching

cord and couching 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.2 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative

stitching 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching

5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Fagoting cross Fagoting, bridging and

stitch decorative stitching 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in

stretch fabric 4.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Ladder stitch Decorative stitching

4.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16)
Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching

4.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Decorative Decorative stitching

stitch 5.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(7/32) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
S-70

Presser foot
needle
Serpentine Decorative stitching and

stitch attaching elastic 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Decorative Decorative stitching and

stitch appliqué 6.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

stippling stitch 7.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/4) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple

straight at left 1.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(1/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple

straight at center 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, top stitching

zigzag 6.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, lace

attaching pin stitch 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hemstitching Decorative hems

3.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hemstitching Decorative hems daisy stitch

6.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems

5.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16)

5.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16)

5.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

5.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

4.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Honeycomb Heirloom, decorative hems

stitch 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Honeycomb Heirloom, decorative hems

stitch 6.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.5 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

6.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

6.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16)
Sewing S-71

Presser foot
needle

6.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

4.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)

5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging

stitch 6.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Hemstitching Decorative hems. Fagoting,

attaching ribbon 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.0 0.4 - 5.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking

6.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking

5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Narrow rounded Buttonhole on light to medium

buttonhole weight fabrics 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Wide round Buttonholes with extra space

ended for larger buttons 5.5 3.5 - 5.5 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
buttonhole (7/32) (1/8 - 7/32) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Tapered round Reinforced waist tapered

ended buttonholes 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
buttonhole (3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Round ended Buttonholes with vertical bar

buttonhole tack in heavyweight fabrics 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Round ended Buttonholes with bar tack

buttonhole 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Round double Buttonholes for fine, medium

ended to heavyweight fabrics 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
buttonhole (3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Narrow squared Buttonholes for light to

buttonhole medium weight fabrics 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Wide squared Buttonholes with extra space

buttonhole for larger decorative buttons 5.5 3.5 - 5.5 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(7/32) (1/8 - 7/32) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Stretch Buttonholes for stretch or

buttonhole woven fabrics 6.0 3.0 - 6.0 1.0 0.5 - 2.0
NO
(15/64) (1/8 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/32 - 1/16)
Heirloom Buttonholes for heirloom and

buttonhole stretch fabrics 6.0 3.0 - 6.0 1.5 1.0 - 3.0
NO
(15/64) (1/8 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/16 - 1/8)
Bound The first step in making bound

buttonhole buttonholes 5.0 0.0 - 6.0 2.0 0.2 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
S-72

Presser foot
needle
Keyhole Buttonholes in heavyweight or

buttonhole thick fabrics for larger flat 7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
NO
buttons (1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)
Tapered keyhole Buttonholes in medium to

buttonhole heavy weight fabrics for larger 7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
NO
flat buttons (1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)
Keyhole Buttonholes with vertical bar

buttonhole tack for reinforcement in 7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
NO
heavyweight or thick fabrics (1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)
Darning Darning of medium weight

fabric 7.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 2.5
NO
(1/4) (3/32 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/32)
Darning Darning of heavyweight fabric

7.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 2.5
NO
(1/4) (3/32 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/32)
Bar tack Reinforcement at opening of

pocket, etc. 2.0 1.0 - 3.0 0.4 0.3 - 1.0
NO
(1/16) (1/16 - 1/8) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
Button sewing Attaching buttons

3.5 2.5 - 4.5
— — NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16)
Eyelet For making eyelets, holes on 7.0 6.0 5.0 7.0 6.0 5.0
belts, etc. 7.0 7.0
(1/4 15/64 (1/4 15/64 NO
(1/4) (1/4)
3/16) 3/16)
Diagonally left For attaching appliqué on
up (Straight) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners
Reverse For attaching appliqué on

(Straight) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners
Diagonally right For attaching appliqué on

up (Straight) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners
Sideways to left For attaching appliqué on

(Straight) tubular pieces of fabric — — — — NO
Sideways to For attaching appliqué on

right (Straight) tubular pieces of fabric — — — — NO
Diagonally left For attaching appliqué on

down (Straight) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners
Forward For attaching appliqué on

(Straight) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners
Diagonally right For attaching appliqué on

down (Straight) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners
Sideways to left For attaching appliqué on

(Zigzag) tubular pieces of fabric — — — — NO
Sideways to For attaching appliqué on

right (Zigzag) tubular pieces of fabric — — — — NO
Sewing S-73

Presser foot
needle
Forward For attaching appliqué on

(Zigzag) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners
Reverse For attaching appliqué on

(Zigzag) tubular pieces of fabric and — — — — NO
mitering corners

(Middle) 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
— — NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

(Right) 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) right 5.50 0.00 - 7.00 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
seam allowance (7/32) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

(Left) 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left 1.50 0.00 - 7.00 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
seam allowance (1/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hand-look Quilting stitch made to look

quilting like hand quilting stitch 3.50 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Basting stitch Basting

3.50 0.00 - 7.00 20 5 - 30
NO
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/4) (3/16 - 1-3/16)
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing

and decorative applications 1.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Quilting Zigzag stitch for quilting and

appliqué zigzag sewing on appliqué quilt 3.50 0.00 - 7.00 1.6 0.0 - 5.0
NO
stitch pieces (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16)
Zigzag stitch Start from right needle

(Right) position, zigzag sew at left 3.50 2.50 - 5.00 1.6 0.3 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Zigzag stitch Start from left needle position,

(Left) zigzag sew at right 3.50 2.50 - 5.00 1.6 0.3 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
2 steps elastic Overcasting (medium weight

zigzag and stretch fabrics), tape and 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 1.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
elastic (3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
3 steps elastic Overcasting (medium,

zigzag heavyweight and stretch 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 1.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
fabrics), tape and elastic (3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Quilting Quilting stitch for invisible

appliqué stitch appliqué or attaching binding 2.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on

fabrics 4.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.2 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket

stitch 3.50 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Quilting Background quilting

stippling 7.00 0.00 - 7.00 1.6 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(1/4) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Overcasting Stretch knit seam

stitch 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 4.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
S-74

Presser foot
needle
Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in

stretch fabric 5.50 0.00 - 7.00 1.4 0.2 - 5.0
NO
(7/32) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Serpentine Decorative stitching and

stitch attaching elastic 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching

5.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Fagoting cross Fagoting, bridging and

stitch decorative stitching 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching

cord and couching 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 1.2 0.2 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Patchwork Patchwork stitches, decorative

double overlock stitching 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
stitch (3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative

stitching 5.00 0.00 - 7.00 1.6 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching

4.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.5 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)
Decorative Decorative stitching and

stitch appliqué 6.00 0.00 - 7.00 1.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

stitch 5.50 0.00 - 7.00 1.6 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(7/32) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

5.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging

stitch 6.00 0.00 - 7.00 2.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Single diamond Reinforcement and seaming

overcast stretch fabric 6.00 0.00 - 7.00 3.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(15/64) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/64 - 3/16)
Overcasting Reinforcement of stretch

stitch fabric or decorative stitching 4.00 0.00 - 7.00 4.0 0.4 - 5.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/64 - 3/16)
Sewing S-75
S Sewing
Chapter 3
Character/Decorative Stitches
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS ............................... 77

Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch
Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns ...........78
Characters ................................................................................78
■ Deleting Characters ................................................................. 79
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing .............................................. 80
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS ................................... 81
Sewing Attractive Finishes .......................................................81
Basic Sewing .............................................................................81
Making Adjustments ................................................................82
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS................................... 84
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 84
Changing the Size .....................................................................86
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ......87
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image .............................................87
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ........................................87
Sewing a Pattern Continuously ................................................87
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .......88
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern.................................88
Checking the Image ..................................................................89
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS............................ 90
Before Combining .....................................................................90
Combining Various Stitch Patterns ..........................................90
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns .............................91
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ...............92
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length .........................92
Making Step Stitch Patterns
(for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .......................................93
■ More Examples......................................................................... 94
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ......................... 95
Stitch Data Precautions ............................................................95
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used ..................................... 95
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used........................ 95
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following
Specifications can be Used....................................................... 95
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data ...... 95
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ......................96
■ If the Memory is Full ................................................................ 96
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media.........................................97
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer.....................................98
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ............99
Recalling from USB Media ......................................................100
Recalling from the Computer..................................................101

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

S
3
Press to display the screen below. There are 7 categories of Character/Decorative stitch patterns.
a c
b
d e
f
g
h
i j
a Decorative stitch patterns

b 7mm decorative stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
c Satin stitch patterns
d 7mm satin stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
e Cross stitch
f Utility decorative stitch patterns
g Characters (Gothic font, Handwriting font, Outline, Cyrillic font, Japanese font)
h Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page S-99)
i Patterns saved in USB media (see page S-100)
j Patterns saved on the computer (see page S-101)
.
Note
• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the screen by pressing . While the screen is locked, no other
key can be operated.
Sewing S-77
Selecting Decorative Stitch Characters

Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Example: Entering “Blue Sky”.
Patterns/Satin Stitch
Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch a
Press .
Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility
Decorative Stitch Patterns
a
Select the category of the pattern you want
to sew.
b
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to sew.
b
Press , , , or
* Touch the bar that appears between and to
leap multiple pages at one time. to select a font.
* To select a different stitch pattern, press .
When the current stitch pattern is erased, select the
new stitch pattern.
Memo
• There are four fonts for alphabet character
stitching, and a font for Japanese character
stitching. Refer to the Quick Reference
Guide for the details about the different font
selections available.
c
Press a tab to change the selection screens.
→ The selected pattern is displayed.
S-78
d
Press and then enter “B”.
h
Press and then enter “ky”.
S
3
e
Press and then enter “lue”. * If you want to continue entering characters in a
different font, press , and then repeat from
step b.
■ Deleting Characters
a
Press to delete the last character.
f
Press to enter a space.
g
Press again and enter “S”. Memo
• Characters are deleted individually starting
with the last character entered.
b
Select the correct character.
* Continually press and all characters will be

deleted.
a
a Space is a jumping stitch

* Remove the jumping stitches after sewing.
Sewing S-79
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing

b
Press or to adjust character spacing.
The space between the characters can be adjusted.
a
Press .
* Press to display on the screen.
* Press to increase the character spacing and
press to decrease the character spacing.
Example:
→ The character spacing window appears. * Each setting equals a specific distance between
characters.
Value mm
0 0
1 0.18
2 0.36
3 0.54
4 0.72
5 0.9
6 1.08
7 1.26
8 1.44
9 1.62
10 1.8
Memo
• The default setting is “0”. No number less
than “0” can be set.
• Changing character spacing by this
method, pertains to all characters. Spacing
changes are valid not only while entering
characters but also before and after the
entering of characters.
S-80
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

S
Sewing Attractive Finishes
To achieve attractive results when sewing character/decorative stitches, check the table below for the
3
proper fabric/thread/needle combinations.
Note
• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so
you should always sew a few trial stitches before beginning your project.
• When sewing satin stitch patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of stitches, so be sure to
attach a stabilizer material.
• Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.
Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach stabilizer on the
wrong side of the fabric. If you do not wish to do so, place the fabric on a thin paper such as tracing paper.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
c Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine needle 90/14
Presser foot Monogramming foot “N”.
Using another presser foot may give inferior results.
d
Basic Sewing sewing.
a
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot, pull
the upper thread out to the side, and then
lower the presser foot.
CAUTION
• When sewing 7 mm satin stitch patterns and
the stitches are bunched, lengthen the stitch
length. If you continue sewing when the
stitches are bunched, the needle may bend or
break (“Setting the Stitch Length” on
page S-10).
Sewing S-81
Memo Note
• If the fabric is pulled or pushed during • When sewing some patterns, the needle will
sewing, the pattern may not turn out temporarily pause in the raised position
correctly. Also, depending on the pattern, while the fabric is fed due to the operation
there may be movement to the left and right of the needle bar separation mechanism
as well as front and back. Guide the fabric which is used in this machine. At such
with your hand to keep the fabric feeding times, a clicking sound different from the
straight and even during sewing. sound generated during sewing will be
heard. This sound is normal and is not the
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sign of a malfunction.
sewing.
f
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or Making Adjustments
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew
reinforcement stitches. Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,
depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the
stabilizer material used, sewing speed, etc. If your
sewing does not turn out well, sew trial stitches
using the same conditions as the real sewing, and
adjust the stitch pattern as explained below. If the
pattern does not turn out well even after making
adjustments based on the pattern, make
adjustments for each pattern individually.
a
Memo Press and select on 19/24.
• When sewing character stitches, the
machine automatically sews reinforcement
stitches at the beginning and end of each
character.
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess

thread between letters.
S-82
b
Attach monogramming foot “N” and sew * If the pattern is bunched:
the pattern. Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button S

3
is pressed and the pattern will lengthen.
* If the pattern has gaps:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button

is pressed and the pattern will shorten.
c
Compare the finished pattern to the
illustration of the correct pattern below.
* If the pattern is skewed to the left:

Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
d
Press , and then adjust the pattern is pressed and the pattern will slide to the right.
with the “Fine Adjust Verti.” or “Fine

Adjust Horiz.” displays.
* If the pattern is skewed to the right:

Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button

is pressed and the pattern will slide to the left.
e
Sew the stitch pattern again.
* If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
comes out correctly.
Memo
• You can sew with the setting screen on the
display.
f
Sewing S-83
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

■ Key Functions
You can create just the finish you want using the editing functions. Make patterns larger or smaller, make mirror
images, etc.
Note
• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the
displayed keys are available when a pattern is selected.
u
t
s
r
b l q
c p
m
d k
e j o
n
f i
g h
x
v
S-84

a Pattern display size Show the approximate size of the pattern selected.
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
S-21
S

* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of
3
fabric and thread that is used.
b Pivot key Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is S-15
selected, stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the
presser foot automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the
presser foot is automatically lowered.
• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.

• Be sure the “Needle Position - UP/DOWN” of Machine Settings is set to
the down position.
c Free motion mode Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode. S-40
key The feed dog is lowered and presser foot is raised to a height appropriate
for free motion quilting.
d Automatic Press this key to turn on the automatic reinforcement stitching mode. S-5
reinforcement stitch
key
e Automatic thread Press this key to turn on the automatic thread cutting mode. S-13
cutting key
f Horizontal mirror After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal mirror S-87
image key image of the stitch pattern.
g Stitch width and Shows the stitch width and stitch length of the selected stitch pattern. The S-10 to
stitch length key machine default settings are highlighted. S-12
h Thread tension key Shows the thread tension setting for the selected stitch pattern. The S-12
machine default settings are highlighted
i Memory key Use this key to save stitch pattern combinations. S-96 to S-97
j Elongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press this key to choose S-87
from 5 automatic length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width
or stitch length settings.
k Needle mode Press this key to choose single needle sewing or twin needle sewing. “Basic
selection key operations”
(Single/Double)
l Sensor function key Press this key to use the sensor function.
m Size selection key Use this key to select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small). S-86
n Image key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. S-89
o Vertical mirror image After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a vertical mirror S-87
key image of the stitch pattern.
p Thread density key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to change the thread density S-88
of the pattern.
q Delete key When you make a mistake selecting a stitch pattern, use this key to delete S-78,
the mistake. When you make a mistake in combining stitch patterns, use S-79
this key to delete stitch patterns.
r Single/Repeat sewing Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches. S-87
key
s Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the S-88
pattern.
t Home page screen (For embroidery and sewing machine only) –

key Press this key to return to the home page screen.
u Screen lock key Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the various S-18
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot
be changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.
Sewing S-85

v Guideline marker key Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The S-14
(For models equipped guideline marker makes it easier to align stitches with the fabric edge or
with the guideline other marker on the fabric.
marker)
w “L/R SHIFT” key S-11
Press to shift the stitch pattern to the right or press to shift the
pattern to the left. This feature is not available on all patterns. Only those
applicable will be shifted. The machine default setting is highlighted.
x Character spacing Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. S-80
key
y Function page key Press this key to show all the functions available in this screen. S-80
Changing the Size
Select a stitch pattern, then press to change the size of the stitch pattern. The stitch pattern will be
sewn in the size highlighted on the key.
Memo
• If you continue entering stitch patterns after changing the size, those patterns will also be sewn in that
size.
• You cannot change the size of combined stitch patterns once the stitch pattern is entered.
Actual Stitch Pattern Size

* The size differs depending on the fabric and threads.
S-86
Changing the Length (for 7mm Creating a Horizontal Mirror

Satin Stitch Patterns Only) Image S
When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press
to choose from 5 automatic length settings,
To create a horizontal mirror image, select a stitch
pattern then press .
3
without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch
length settings.
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image Sewing a Pattern Continuously

To create a vertical mirror image, select a stitch
Press to select continuous sewing or single
pattern then press .
stitch sewing.
Memo
• To finish a complete motif while sewing the
pattern continuously, you can press the
key while sewing. The machine will
automatically stop when the motif is
finished.
Sewing S-87
Changing Thread Density Returning to the Beginning of the

(for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) Pattern
When sewing character/decorative stitches, you
After selecting a satin stitch pattern, press to can return to the beginning of the pattern after trial
select your preferred thread density. sewing or when the stitching is sewn incorrectly.
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine, and then press .
→ Sewing returns to the beginning of the selected

pattern (“W”) from the point where sewing was
CAUTION stopped.
• If the stitches bunch when thread density is Memo

changed to , return the thread density to • If this key is pressed when sewing is
stopped, patterns can be added at the end
. If you continue sewing when the stitches of a combined stitch pattern. (In this
example, “!” is added.)
are bunched, the needle may bend or break.
Memo
• Even if you select a new pattern after
changing the thread density, the thread
density remains the same until you change
it.
• You cannot change thread density for a
combined pattern after additional patterns
are added.
b
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
sewing.
S-88
d
Use / / / to view any part of
Checking the Image
the image that extends out of the viewable
You can display an approximate size image of the display area. S
selected stitch pattern. You can also check and
change the colors of the image on the screen. 3
a
Press .
→ An image of the selected pattern is displayed.
b
Press to change the thread color in
the image to red, blue, or black.
e
Memo
• You can also sew from this screen when the
presser foot symbol is displayed.
• Image of some patterns will display in
→ The color changes every time you press the button. default size only.
c
Press to display the enlarged image.
Sewing S-89
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

You can combine many varieties of stitch patterns, such as character stitches, cross stitches or satin
stitches. You can also combine stitch patterns of different sizes, mirror image stitch patterns, and others.
Before Combining
Single stitch sewing is automatically selected for sewing combined patterns. If you want to sew the
pattern continuously, press after finishing the stitch pattern combination.
When changing sizes, creating mirror images, or making other adjustments to a combined stitch pattern,
be sure to edit the selected stitch pattern before selecting the next one. You cannot edit a stitch pattern
once the next stitch pattern is selected.
Combining Various Stitch

b
Select .
Patterns
Example:
c
Press .
a
Press .
→ The display returns to the stitch selection screen.
d
Press .
S-90
e a
Select . Press .
S
3
→ The large size stitch will be selected.
b
Press again, then press to select
the small size.
f
Press to sew the pattern continuously.
g
Press .
→ The pattern is displayed in a smaller size.
c
Press to sew continuously.
Memo
• Patterns are deleted individually starting
with the last pattern entered by pressing
.
Combining Large and Small

Stitch Patterns → The entered pattern is repeated.
Example:
Sewing S-91
Combining Horizontal Mirror Combining Stitch Patterns of

Image Stitch Patterns Different Length
Example: Example:
a a
Press . Press , then press once.
→ The length of the image is set to .
b
Press again, then press .
b
Select again, then press 3 times.
→ The pattern is flipped along a vertical axis.
c
Press .
→ The length of the image is set to .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
S-92
Example:
c
Press .
S
3
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for

7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
You can use the keys with 7mm satin

stitch patterns to create a step effect. → The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
Stitch patterns sewn so that they create a step
c
effect are called step stitch patterns. Press again.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the left.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the right.
d
Press .
→ The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
Sewing S-93
e
Press . Press → → → .
→ The entered pattern is repeated. Press → → → → →
■ More Examples → → → .
Press → → → → .
Press → → → → →
→ → → .
S-94
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

S
Stitch Data Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using stitch data other than that created and saved in this
3
machine.
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used
• In the Character/Decorative Stitch memory, “.pmv”, “.pmx” and “.pmu” stitch data files can be used with this
machine. “.pmu” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is
saved as a “.pmv” stitch data file. Using data other than that created using this machine or the machine which
create “.pmu” data file, may cause the machine to malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB external media. Use external media that meets the following
specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only from;

• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
• Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• xD-Picture Card
Note
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to 6
seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).
• To create file folders, use a computer.

■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be
Used
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the stitch data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains special
characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We recommend
using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_”.
• Stitch data in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If stitch data is stored in a folder in “Removable
Disk”, that stitch data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
Sewing S-95
■ If the Memory is Full

Saving Stitch Patterns in the If the following screen appears while you are trying
Machine’s Memory to save a pattern on the machine’s memory, the
memory is too full to hold the currently selected
You can save often used stitch patterns in the stitch pattern. To save the stitch pattern in the
machine’s memory. A total of about 1 MB of stitch machine’s memory, you have to delete a previously
patterns can be saved in the machine’s memory. saved stitch pattern.
a
Note Press .
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose * Press to return to the original screen without
the stitch pattern you are saving. saving.
Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a stitch
pattern.
• See page S-99 for information on retrieving
a saved stitch pattern.
a
Press .
b
Choose a stitch pattern to delete.
* Press if you decide not to delete the stitch

pattern.
b
Press . a

saving.
a Pockets holding saved stitch patterns
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern

is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
S-96
c
Press .
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB
Media S
When sending stitch patterns from the machine to
USB media, plug the USB media into the
machine’s top USB port.
3
Memo
• USB media is commercially available, but
some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
→ A confirmation message appears. more details.
d
Press . used, either directly plug the USB device
* If you decide not to delete the stitch pattern, press USB media Reader/Writer into the
.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time except when saving or deleting.
a
Press .
→ The machine deletes the stitch pattern, then

automatically saves the new stitch pattern.
Sewing S-97
b
the machine. Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the stitch
patterns can be temporarily retrieved from and
saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in your
computer. A total of about 3 MB of stitch patterns
can be saved in the “Removable Disk”, but the
saved stitch patterns are deleted when the
machine is turned OFF.
Note
a USB port “Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.
b USB media
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
Note corresponding USB ports for the computer
• The processing speed may vary by quantity
of data. and for the machine.
b
• Two USB media cannot be used with this Turn on your computer and select
machine at the same time. If two USB
media are inserted, only the USB media “Computer (My computer)”.
inserted first is detected. * The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
on the computer and machine whether or not they
are turned on.
c
Press .

saving.

automatically.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose a USB port for computer
some or all of the pattern you are saving. b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
“Computer (My computer)” on the computer.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
insert it with force and check the orientation
of the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
S-98
c
Press .
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from
the Machine’s Memory S
a
Press . 3
→ The pocket selection screen appears.
b
Choose a stitch pattern to retrieve.
d
Press . * If the entire saved stitch pattern is not displayed,
press the thumbnail.
* Press to return to the original screen without * Press to return to the original screen without
saving. saving.
a
→ The stitch pattern will be temporarily saved to
“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
computer)”.
e
Select the stitch pattern’s .pmv file and
copy the file to the computer.
a Saved stitch patterns
c
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern.
Note
• Do not turn off the machine while the → The selected stitch pattern is retrieved and the
“Saving” screen is showing. You may lose sewing screen will be displayed.
the data.
Sewing S-99
c
Press when there is a subfolder to
Recalling from USB Media
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
You can recall a specific stitch pattern from either media, the stitch pattern in the subfolder is
direct USB media or a folder in the USB media. If displayed.
the stitch pattern is in a folder, check each folder
to find the stitch pattern. * Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
a
Insert the USB Media into the USB port on
the machine (see page S-97).
a
→ Stitch patterns and a subfolder within a folder are

displayed. Select the folder to display the patterns in
it.
a USB port
b USB media
b
Press .
c
→ Stitch patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
b
a Folder name
b Stitch patterns in a folder show only the first
pattern of any combined patterns.
c Path
* Press to return to the previous folder.

* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
to recall.
S-100
c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
e
Press .
Disk”.
* Press to delete the stitch pattern. The pattern S
3
will be deleted from the USB media.
→ Stitch pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to
the machine.
Note
• While data is being written, do not
disconnect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
screen will be displayed. pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
Recalling from the Computer
d
Press .
a
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine (see page S-98).
b
On the computer, open “Computer (My
computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
→ The stitch patterns in the computer are displayed on

the selection screen.
e
to recall.

recalling.
Sewing S-101
f
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern.

The pattern will be deleted from the “Removable
Disk” folder in your computer.
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing

screen will be displayed.
Note
• The pattern recalled from the computer is
only temporarily written to the machine. It is
erased from the machine when the machine
is turned off. If you wish to keep the stitch
pattern, store it in the machine (“Saving
Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory”
on page S-96).
S-102
S
3
Sewing S-103
S Sewing
Chapter 4
How to Create Bobbin Work
(Sewing)
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK........................................ 105
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK......................... 105

Required Materials..................................................................105
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover ............................................... 105
■ Lower thread.......................................................................... 106
■ Upper thread ......................................................................... 106
■ Needle ................................................................................... 106
■ Presser foot ............................................................................ 106
■ Fabric ..................................................................................... 106
Upper Threading.....................................................................106
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ..................................................107
■ When tension is applied to the bobbin thread........................ 109
■ When tension is not applied to the bobbin thread ................. 110
CREATING BOBBIN WORK .................................. 111
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing ..........................................111
■ Finishing the thread ends ....................................................... 113
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing ..........................................113
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION.................... 114
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension ........................................ 114
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread ............................ 114
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................... 115
■ The thread was activated and the bobbin thread is caught
inside the machine ................................................................. 115
■ Correcting bobbin work tension ............................................ 115
■ The bobbin thread catches on the tension spring
of the bobbin case.................................................................. 115

ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK

S
Beautiful embroidery work, with a three-dimensional appearance, can be created by winding the bobbin
with medium to heavy weight thread or ribbon, which is too thick to be threaded through the machine’s
needle. The decorative thread or ribbon will stitch out on the underneath side of fabric while sewing with
the fabric wrong side facing up.
4
How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)

1. Utility stitches 2. Decorative stitches 3. Free motion sewing
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
Required Materials
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover Bobbin cover
There are two small v-shaped tabs on the back of
the bobbin cover as indicated by the letter “B”.
The tabs help hold the bobbin in place so it does
not lift up while thick thread is being pulled
through.
Bobbin case (gray)

There is a notch at the location indicated by the
letter “A”.
Sewing S-105
■ Lower thread ■ Presser foot

We recommend the following types of threads for Utility stitches or decorative stitches:
bobbin work. Monogramming foot “N”
No.5 or finer hand embroidery

thread or decorative thread
Free motion sewing:
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
Flexible woven ribbon
Fine embroidery ribbon (silk or

silk-like material) (3.5 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) or less is recommended)
■ Fabric
Be sure to sew trial stitches on a piece of scrap
* When wide ribbon or heavy weight threads are being used, we fabric, which includes the same threads and fabric
recommend test sewing with the thread through and also as what is being used in your project.
bypassing the bobbin case tension to see which gives the best
stitching results. Note
If wide ribbon such as 3.5mm (approx. 1/8 inch) is to be used, • The sewing results may be affected by the
we recommend that bobbin case tension not be applied. Refer type of fabric used. Before sewing your
to page S-110 for more detailed instructions.
project, be sure to sew trial stitches on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as the
Note fabric used in the project.
• Do not use thread heavier than No.5 hand
embroidery thread.
• Some threads may not be appropriate for
bobbin work. Be sure to sew trial stitches
Upper Threading
before sewing on your project.
a
Install a needle appropriate for the upper
■ Upper thread thread and fabric to be used.
Sewing machine embroidery thread (polyester For details on installing the needle, refer to
thread) or monofilament (transparent nylon) thread. “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of “Basic operations”.
If you do not wish for the upper thread to be visible,
b
we recommend using transparent nylon Attach the presser foot.
monofilament thread or polyester light weight
thread (50wt. or above) that is the same color as the
c
lower thread. Thread the machine with the upper thread.
■ Needle For details on threading the machine, refer to
“Upper Threading” of “Basic operations”.
Use a needle appropriate for the upper thread and
fabric being used. Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” of “Basic operations”.
S-106
f
Wipe the bobbin case (gray) with a soft lint
Preparing the Bobbin Thread free cloth to clean it.
In order to create bobbin work, the bobbin case g

Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark S
4
must be replaced with the one for bobbin work. on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
Before creating bobbin work, clean the bobbin case
and the race.

a
Raise the needle and presser foot, and then
turn off the machine.
a
b
Remove the flat bed attachment.
c
b
and then slide it toward you to remove it.
a b
a Needle plate cover * Align the S and ● marks.
d
Remove the bobbin case.
a S mark on the bobbin case

b ● mark on the machine
a Bobbin case c Bobbin case
e
Use the cleaning brush included with the Note
machine or a vacuum cleaner to remove • The bobbin case (gray) cannot be used for
any lint and dust from the race and its sewing in any way other than bobbin work.
surrounding area. After sewing bobbin work, refer back to the
steps in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on
page S-107 for removing and cleaning the
bobbin case (gray), and then reinstall the
standard bobbin case.
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the bobbin case (gray) when
creating bobbin work. Using any other bobbin
a Cleaning brush case may result in the thread becoming
b Race
tangled or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed. If the bobbin case is incorrectly
installed, the thread may become tangled or
Sewing S-107
h
Install the needle plate cover.
For details on installing the needle plate cover,
refer to “Cleaning the Race” of “Appendix”. CAUTION
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
• The included bobbin was designed specifically

a Needle plate cover models are used, the machine will not operate
i
Install the flat bed attachment. bobbins of the same type (part code:
X52800-150).
j
Insert the thread tail from the spool of
thread through the hole in the bobbin from
the inside to the outside. Hold the thread
tail while winding the thread around the
bobbin by hand. After winding the bobbin
so it is filled as shown below (about 80%),
cut the thread.
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
Note
• Slowly and evenly wind the thread around
the bobbin.
• For best results, wind the bobbin so the
thread is snug and not twisted.
k
Using scissors carefully trim the thread tail
as close to the bobbin as possible.
a Beginning of wound thread
CAUTION
• If thread extends beyond the top of the bobbin
too much, the thread may become tangled or
the needle may break.
S-108
Memo
• If inserting thread tail through bobbin hole is
difficult, bobbin can be wound by holding
CAUTION S
• When winding the bobbin, make sure the
4
the tail and wrapping thread around inside thread is not frayed. Sewing with frayed
base. Then carefully trim thread tail so it
thread may result in the thread catching on
does not extend from the side of the
bobbin. the tension spring of the bobbin case, the
thread completely becoming tangled or

damage to the machine.
l
Install the bobbin wound with thread.
• Do not guide the bobbin thread completely
Whether or not tension should be applied to the through the groove in the needle plate cover,
bobbin thread depends on the type of thread being
otherwise the lower threading cannot be done
used.
correctly. Thread only as far as shown below.
■ When tension is applied to the
bobbin thread
Insert bobbin into bobbin case so the thread
unwinds from the left side.
Then correctly pass the thread through the tension
spring as shown below.
a Tension spring
Sewing S-109
■ When tension is not applied to the p

Insert tweezers through bobbin thread loop
bobbin thread and pull bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
If the bobbin thread in the trial stitching is too tight
q
and adjusting the bobbin case tension does not help, Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
do not pass the thread through the tension spring. and then pull out about 10 cm (approx.
4 inches) of the threads and pass them
Hold the bobbin with your left hand so the thread
under the presser foot toward the rear of
unwinds from the right side and hold the end of the
thread with your right hand.
the machine.
r
Install the bobbin cover with tabs.
m
Pull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of
bobbin thread.
a Bobbin cover
n
Lightly hold the end of the upper thread → This completes the upper and lower threading.
while turning the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) until the mark on the
handwheel aligns with the center top of
machine.
CAUTION
• When creating bobbin work, use the bobbin
cover with tabs, otherwise the thread may
become tangled or the needle may break.
o
Gently pull the upper thread to bring the
bobbin thread up through the needle plate.
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the

hole in the needle plate.
S-110
CREATING BOBBIN WORK

S
c
4
Increase the upper thread tension. Upper
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing thread tension setting between 6 and 8 is
recommended for bobbin work.
For details on adjusting the upper thread tension,

Note refer to “Setting the Thread Tension” on
• Recommended stitches for bobbin work are page S-12.
open “airy” type stitches.
• Be sure to sew trial stitches using same
fabric and threads as project in order to
check the sewing results.
• The bobbin thread may become tangled
due to the type of pattern and thread that
Note
are being used. Since this may cause the
needle to break, immediately stop sewing if • Before sewing, check that there is enough
this occurs. Turn off the machine and cut thread on the bobbin.
out the tangled thread with scissors. Then,
d
clean the race and bobbin case as Make sure the automatic thread cutting
described in “Fabric is caught in the ( ) and automatic reinforcement
machine and cannot be removed” of stitching ( ) have been turned off.
“Appendix”.
a
CAUTION
• Before sewing, make sure the automatic thread
b
Select a stitch in the Utility and Decorative cutting has been turned off. If sewing is started with
automatic thread cutting turned on, the thread may
become tangled or the machine may be damaged.
Stitches mode. For this example, press .
e
Place stabilizer on top (wrong side) of the
fabric.
Memo
• For best results, select a longer stitch length Note
and a wider stitch width. Depending on the • Type and weight of stabilizer will depend on
selected stitch, it may not be possible to fabric and thread being used.
change the stitch length and stitch width
f
settings. If thread is too thick to pull through fabric
to machine surface use an awl to punch a
small hole in the fabric at the beginning of
stitching so the bobbin thread can be fed
through the opening.
• Depending on the fabric, bunched stitches
may result. We recommend selecting a
simple stitch and sewing trial stitches to
check the sewing results.
Examples of simple stitches: , ,
g
Press .
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
Sewing S-111
h
Use the presser foot lever to raise the
presser foot. Note
• If the bobbin thread does not come up, hold
i
With the wrong side facing up, place the the upper thread as shown below to pull up
fabric under the presser foot. the bobbin thread.
a Upper thread
l
a Wrong side of fabric Raise the presser foot lever, and then use
tweezers to pull up the bobbin thread and
j
Turn the handwheel toward you
bring the end of the thread to the top of the
(counterclockwise) to feed the needle into
fabric.
the fabric or punched hole. Position the
upper thread over the presser foot and
lightly hold, and then lower the presser foot Note
lever. • Pull the thread while holding down the
fabric so it does not move out of place.
m
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pass them under the presser foot
toward the rear of the machine.
a Punched hole
b Upper thread over the presser foot
k
Pulling the upper thread gently, turn the
n
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) While gently holding threads at the rear of
until the mark on the handwheel aligns with the machine, turn the handwheel to feed
the center top of machine. the needle into the fabric or punched hole
again, and then lower the presser foot lever.
o
Press on lower part of LCD screen.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
p
Select a low speed, gently hold the threads
behind the presser foot and start sewing.
Threads can be released after several
stitches have been made.

hole in the fabric.
S-112
q
When you have reached the end of the
stitching area, stop the machine. Note
• If it is difficult to place bobbin thread
through the eye of a hand sewing needle, S
Note
4
use a ribbon embroidery needle to pull the
• Do not sew reverse or reinforcement thread to the wrong side of the fabric.
stitches at the end of the stitching, Otherwise, use an awl to pull up the bobbin
otherwise the threads may become tangled thread.
or the needle may break. In addition, it will

be difficult to pull the bobbin thread up to
b
Working from the wrong side of the fabric,
tie the bobbin and upper threads together
by hand. Cut away excess threads with
r
Raise the needle and presser foot.
scissors.
s
Leaving about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) of
thread at the ends, use scissors to cut the
threads.

Note
• To ensure threads do not come undone
after being tied place a drop of fabric glue
on knots.
a 10 cm (approx. 4 inches)
c
If the desired results could not be achieved,
Note adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button to
of the upper thread, and then try sewing the
cut the threads, otherwise the machine may
be damaged. stitching again.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE
■ Finishing the thread ends THREAD TENSION” on page S-114.
a
At the end of the stitching, use a hand Bobbin Work Free Motion
sewing needle to bring the bobbin thread
up to the wrong side of the fabric. Sewing
If so desired, use a template or draw your design
on the stabilizer to allow for ease of stitching.
Remember, your stitches with your decorative
thread will be on the underneath right side of your
fabric and the stabilizer will be on the top wrong
side of your fabric.
* For information about using free motion open toe
quilting foot “O”, refer to “Free Motion Quilting” on
page S-40.

b Bobbin thread
Sewing S-113
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION

After sewing trial stitches and checking the sewing results, adjust the thread tensions if necessary. After adjusting the
tensions, be sure to sew trial stitches again in order to check the sewing results.
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension
Note
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the upper
• Turning the screw on the bobbin case (gray)
thread tension when sewing bobbin work.
may push up the spring plate, as shown
Refer to “Setting the Thread Tension” on page S-12. below.
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin If this occurs, gently press down the spring
plate with a screwdriver so it is lower than
thread the top surface of the bobbin case (gray),
If the desired stitching cannot be achieved after and then insert the bobbin case into the
adjusting the upper thread tension, adjust the tension of machine.
the bobbin thread. The tension of the bobbin thread can
be adjusted by turning the slotted-head (–) screw on the
bobbin case (gray) for bobbin work.
a Do not turn the phillips screw (+).

b Adjust with a small screwdriver. a Spring plate
To increase the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the

slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° clockwise.
CAUTION
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the bobbin case (gray) as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it useless.
• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
To decrease the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the providing force in either (rotational) direction may
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° counterclockwise. cause damage to the bobbin case. Should damage
occur, the bobbin case may not maintain proper
tension.
Note
• If the bobbin thread tension is tight, the
thread cannot be passed through the
tension spring when the bobbin is installed
in the bobbin case. (Refer to “When tension
is not applied to the bobbin thread” on
page S-110.)
S-114
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Several solutions for minor problems are described below. If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized
S
Baby Lock retailer.
■ The thread was activated and the d
Apply slight tension on bobbin thread by
holding thread out to the left side of presser
4
bobbin thread is caught inside the

foot. Press the “Thread Cutter” button
machine again.
a
Cut the thread near the fabric above the
needle plate, and then remove the fabric.
a Thread CAUTION
• Do not pull on the thread with excessive force,
b
Remove the bobbin, and then hold it out otherwise the machine may be damaged.
toward the left side of the machine.
■ Correcting bobbin work tension
* If the top thread shows on the bobbin side of the
fabric, increase the upper tension (Refer to
“ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION” on
page S-114).
* If the top thread still shows on the bobbin side of the
fabric, reduce the tension of the bobbin thread or
bypass the bobbin tension. (Refer to “ADJUSTING
THE THREAD TENSION” on page S-114.)
* Some bobbin threads are too coarse to pass through
to wrong side of fabric. In this case, be sure to color
match top thread with bobbin threads.
c
Lower the presser foot. Example: Decorative Stitch
a Correct tension
b The upper thread tension is too loose, or the
bobbin thread tension is too tight.
■ The bobbin thread catches on the

tension spring of the bobbin case
Sew with no tension applied to the bobbin thread.
(Refer to “When tension is not applied to the bobbin
thread” on page S-110.)
Sewing S-115
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-116
Embroidering
This section provides instruction to embroider designs with this machine.
Page number starts with “E” in this section.
Before starting embroidery work, refer to “BEFORE EMBROIDERING” of “Basic operations”.
The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or regions.
Chapter1 Embroidery ............................................................. E-2

Chapter2 Embroidery Edit .................................................... E-56
Chapter3 How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)........... E-86

EEmbroidering
Chapter 1
Embroidery
SELECTING PATTERNS .............................................. 3 Changing the Thread Color Display ......................................... 34

Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display”.............................. 35
■ Copyright Information .............................................................. 3
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral REVISING THE PATTERN ........................................ 36
Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns .................................................4
Moving the Pattern................................................................... 36
Selecting Character Patterns .......................................................5
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ........................................ 36
Selecting Frame Patterns.............................................................7
Changing the Size of the Pattern .............................................. 37
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards..................................7
Rotating the Pattern ................................................................. 38
■ About Embroidery Card Reader (Sold Separately) and USB Card
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ........................................ 39
Writer Module*.......................................................................... 7
■ About Embroidery Cards (Sold Separately) ............................... 7 Enlarging the Editing Screen..................................................... 39
Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer ...........................8 Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only) ......................................................................... 40
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN ................. 9
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns .............. 40
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 10 Embroidering Linked Characters .............................................. 41
PREPARING THE FABRIC ........................................ 11 Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Monochrome - Using a Single Color) ...................................... 43
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric ...............11
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ..........................13
■ Types of Embroidery Frames .................................................... 13 Embroidery Data Precautions................................................... 44
■ Inserting the Fabric .................................................................. 14
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used.............................44
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet .................................................... 15
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used ........................44
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges ............................16 ■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics...................................................... 16 Specifications can be Used .......................................................45
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners................................................ 16 ■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data.......45
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape ................................................. 16 ■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data ..................................................45
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME ................ 17 Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ............ 46
■ If the Memory is Full.................................................................46
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame ............................................. 17 Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media............................... 47
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ............... 19 Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer........................... 48
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory .................... 49
Checking the Pattern Position ..................................................19
Recalling from USB Media ....................................................... 50
Previewing the Completed Pattern ..........................................20
Recalling from the Computer ................................................... 51
■ Frame sizes displayed on screen............................................... 20
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN..................... 21 EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS................................ 52
Embroidering Attractive Finishes ..............................................21 Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1)....................... 52
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover .............................................. 22 Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2)....................... 53
Sewing Embroidery Patterns .....................................................22 Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns............................................. 54
Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué ...................23
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS..... 26
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ............................................26
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing .........................................27
Restarting from the Beginning ..................................................28
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power..................28
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS................. 30
Adjusting Thread Tension .........................................................30
■ Correct Thread Tension ........................................................... 30
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ....................................................... 30
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose ...................................................... 30
Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with No Color on the Screw) ........31
■ Correct Tension ....................................................................... 31
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose ..................................................... 31
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight ...................................................... 32
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
(END COLOR TRIM).................................................................32
Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM) ....32
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch Not to Trim ...................... 33
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed ...............................................33

SELECTING PATTERNS
SELECTING PATTERNS
E
■ Copyright Information
The patterns stored in the machine and embroidery cards are intended for private use only. Any public or
commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.
There are many character and decorative embroidery patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the “Quick
1
Embroidery
Reference Guide” for a full summary of patterns in the machine’s memory). You can also use patterns from the
embroidery cards (sold separately).
Once the machine has finished the initialization and the carriage has moved to the start position, the pattern type
selection screen will display.
If another screen is displayed, press , then Embroidery ( or ) to display the screen below.
There are 6 categories of patterns in this machine.
a b
c d
g h
i
a Baby Lock “Exclusives”

b Embroidery pattern Memo
c Floral alphabet patterns • A key that appears stacked, such as
d Frame patterns
e Character patterns and , indicates that
f Bobbin work patterns (see page E-92) there are sub-categories, which must be
g Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see selected before a pattern selection screen
page E-49) appears.
h Patterns saved in USB media (see page E-50)
i Patterns saved on the computer (see page E-51)
j Press this key to position the embroidery unit for
storage
Embroidering E-3
SELECTING PATTERNS
c
Press to create a mirror image of the
Selecting Embroidery
pattern as needed.
Patterns/Baby Lock
* If a mistake has been made when selecting the
“Exclusives”/Floral pattern, press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider and the new selection appears.
Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns
a
Touch the key of the category of the pattern
you want to embroider.
* Refer to “CREATING BOBBIN WORK” on page E-92
about the bobbin work patterns.
d
Press .
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
e
Proceed to “VIEWING THE
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider. EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to
embroider the pattern.
* To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press .

→ The selected pattern is displayed.
E-4
SELECTING PATTERNS
* If you want to change the size of a character, select

Selecting Character Patterns the character and then press to change the
Example: Entering “We Fly”.

size. The size changes each time you press the key, E
1
from large to medium to small.
* If you make a mistake, press to erase the
a
Press . mistake.
* If the pattern is too small to see clearly, you can use
Embroidery
the key to check it.
b
Press the key of the font you want to
e
embroider. Press and enter “e”.
c
Press to change the selection screens.
f
Press to enter a space.
Memo
• If you continue adding characters after
changing the size, the new characters will
be entered in the new size.
• You cannot change the size of the entered
characters after combining character stitch
patterns.
d
Press and then enter “W”.
Embroidering E-5
SELECTING PATTERNS
g i
Press again and enter “F”. Press .

h
Press and then enter “ly”.
j
EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to
pattern, press .
E-6
SELECTING PATTERNS
e
Selecting Frame Patterns EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to
E
a
Press . pattern, press .
1
b
Embroidery
Press the key of the frame shape you want
to embroider in the top part of the screen.
a Frame shapes
b Frame patterns
→ Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom
part of the screen.
c
Press the key of the frame pattern you want
to embroider. Selecting Patterns from
* If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the Embroidery Cards
key of the pattern you want to embroider.
→ The selected pattern is displayed on the screen. ■ About Embroidery Card Reader
(Sold Separately) and USB Card
d
Press .
Writer Module*
• Use only an embroidery card Reader designed
for this machine. Using an unauthorized
embroidery card Reader may cause your
machine to operate incorrectly.
* If you have purchased the Palette Ver5 or later,
Palette Petite or Palette PTS, you can plug the
included USB card writer module into the machine
as an embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
Note
• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from
the machine to an embroidery card inserted
into a connected USB card writer module*.
■ About Embroidery Cards

(Sold Separately)
• Use only embroidery cards manufactured for this
machine. Using unauthorized cards may cause
your machine to operate incorrectly.
• Embroidery cards sold in foreign countries
cannot be used with this machine.
• Store embroidery cards in the hard case.
Embroidering E-7
SELECTING PATTERNS
a c
Plug the optional embroidery card Press the key of the USB port.
Reader/USB card writer module into the
USB port on the machine.
→ The patterns on the embroidery card are displayed

a USB port on the selection screen.
b Embroidery card Reader/USB card writer module
d
Follow the steps on page E-4 to select a
b
Insert the card completely into the card pattern.
Reader/USB card writer module.
* Insert the embroidery card so that the end with a Selecting Patterns from USB
printed arrow is facing up.
Media/Computer
To recall patterns from the computer or USB
media, see pages E-50 to E-51.
Note
• Two embroidery USB card Readers/USB
card writer module cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two
embroidery USB card Readers/USB card
writer module are inserted, only the
embroidery USB card Reader/USB card
writer module inserted first is detected.
E-8
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN

E
1
h i
a
j
b k
Embroidery
c l
d
e m
f
g
a Shows the presser foot code.

Attach embroidery foot “W+” for most embroidery projects. When the foot presser symbol is displayed on the
screen, you are able to sew.
b Shows the boundary for embroidering with the extra large frame (30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)).
c Shows a preview of the selected pattern.
d Shows the size of the selected pattern.
e Shows the embroidery frames that can be used for the selected pattern. Be sure to use the proper frame (see page
E-13).
f Shows how far the sewing position is from the center (when you move the sewing position).
g Shows the degree of rotation of the pattern.
h Shows how many stitches are in the selected pattern and how many stitches have been sewn so far.
i Shows the time necessary to sew the pattern, and the time already spent sewing the pattern (not including time for
changing and automatically trimming the thread).
j Shows the number of colors in the selected pattern, and the number of the color currently being sewn.
k Shows the part of the embroidery that will be sewn with the first thread color.
l Shows the order for thread color changes and the embroidering time for each thread color.
m Press an arrow key to move the pattern in the direction shown by the arrow. (Press the Center key to return the
pattern to the center of the embroidery area.)
* The displayed time is the approximate time that will be required. The actual embroidering time may be longer than the
displayed time, depending on the embroidery frame that is used. In addition, the amount of time required to change
thread colors is not included.
Note
• There is an explanation of additional key functions on the next page.
Embroidering E-9
■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can change the size of the pattern, rotate the pattern, etc.
Note
Q
• Some operations or functions are not
available for certain patterns. If the key
display is light gray, you cannot use that
function or operation with the selected
pattern.
o z
y
x
p w
q
v
r u
s t

n Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, 10 E-38
degrees or 90 degrees at a time.
o Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. E-37
p Multi color key Press this key to change the color of each letter when sewing alphabet E-40
character patterns.
q Return key Press this key to return to the pattern type selection screen. —
r Cut/Tension key Press this key to specify automatic thread cutting, thread trimming or the E-32 to
thread tension. For embroidery, these functions are set automatically. E-33
s Forward/Back key Press this key to move the needle forward or back in the pattern; useful if the E-27 to
thread breaks while sewing or if you want to start again from the beginning. E-29
t Starting point key Press this key to move the needle start position to align the needle with the E-36
pattern position.
u Trial key Press this key to check the position of the pattern.The embroidery frame moves E-19
to the desired position so you can check that there is enough space to sew the
pattern.
v Memory key Press this key to save a pattern in the machine’s memory, USB media or a E-46 to
computer. E-48
w Uninterrupted Press this key to embroider the selected pattern with a single color. E-43
embroidery key
x Density key Press this key to change the density of alphabet character or frame patterns. E-40
y Horizontal mirror Press this key to create a horizontal mirror image of the pattern. E-39
image key
z Function page key Press this key to show all the keys in this screen. E-40
Q Image key Press this key for a preview of the sewn image. E-20
E-10
PREPARING THE FABRIC

E
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm
1
(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.
Embroidery
• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can sew more attractive embroidery by adjusting the
embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery settings screen (see below).
• In the case of thick terry cloth towels we recommend that you place a piece of water soluble stabilizer on
the top surface of the towel. This will help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in more attractive
embroidery.
Note Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers

• Press . In the “Embroidery Foot
(Backing) to the Fabric
Height” display, use and in the
settings screen. Adjust the presser foot For best results in your embroidery projects,
height for thick or puffy fabrics.
always use stabilizer material for embroidery.
Follow the package instructions for the stabilizer
being used.
When using fabrics that cannot be ironed (such as
towel or fabrics that have loops which expand
when ironed) or in places where ironing is
difficult, position the stabilizer material under the
fabric without fusing it, then position the fabric
and stabilizer in the embroidery frame, or check
with your authorized retailer for the correct
stabilizer to use.
• To increase the space between the presser

CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery
foot and the needle plate, set the when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight
embroidery foot height to a larger number, fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics
1.5 mm setting is used for most which cause pattern shrinkage. Otherwise, the
embroidery. needle may break and cause injury. Not using
a stabilizer material may result in a poor finish
to your project.
a
Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger
than the embroidery frame being used.
a Size of the embroidery frame

b Iron-on stabilizer (backing)
Embroidering E-11
b
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the
wrong side of the fabric.
a Fusible side of stabilizer

b Fabric (wrong side)
Memo
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such
as towel or corduroy, use water soluble
stabilizer (sold separately) for best results.
The water soluble stabilizer material will
dissolve completely in water, giving the
project a more attractive finish.
E-12
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame

■ Types of Embroidery Frames
E
The types and numbers of supplied embroidery frames differ depending on the country or region.
Extra Large Large

1
Embroidery
Embroidery field Embroidery field
300 mm × 180 mm 180 mm × 130 mm
(approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) (approx. 7 inches × 5 inches)
Use when embroidering connected or combined characters or Use when embroidering patterns between 100 mm × 100 mm
patterns, or when embroidering large patterns. (approx. 4 inches × 4 inches) and
180 mm × 130 mm (approx. 7 inches × 5 inches).
Other optional embroidery frames can be used. When choosing frames that do not appear on the screen, be sure
to check the design size of the embroidery field of the optional frame. Check with your authorized retailer for
frame compatibility.
Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Included frame options are displayed on the LCD.
a b
a Highlighted: Can be used

b Shaded: Cannot be used
CAUTION
• If you use a frame that is too small, the presser foot may strike the frame during sewing and cause injury.
Embroidering E-13
■ Inserting the Fabric c

Slightly tighten the frame adjustment screw,
and then remove the slack in the fabric by
pulling on the edges and corners. Do not
Note
• If the fabric is not securely held in the loosen the screw.
embroidery frame, the embroidery design
will sew out poorly. Insert the fabric on a
level surface, and gently stretch the fabric
taut in the frame. Follow the steps below to
insert the fabric correctly.
a
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment
screw and remove the inner frame.
d
Gently stretch the fabric taut, and tighten
the frame adjustment screw to keep the
fabric from loosening after stretching.
* After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.
a Frame adjustment screw

b Inner frame
b
Lay the fabric right side up on top of the
outer frame.
Re-insert the inner frame making sure to align the
inner frame’s with the outer frame’s . * Make sure the inside and outside frames are even
before you start embroidering.
a Outer frame
b Inner frame
c Fabric
Memo
• Stretch the fabric from all four corners and
all four edges. While stretching the fabric,
tighten the frame adjustment screw.
a Inner frame’s
b Outer frame’s
c Frame adjustment screw
E-14
e b
Return the frame adjustment screw to its Place the embroidery sheet on the inner
initial position. frame. Align the guide lines on the
embroidery sheet with the mark you made
on the fabric.
E
1
Embroidery
Memo
• You can use the included screwdriver when a Inner frame
you loosen or tighten the frame adjustment b Guide line
screw.
c
Gently stretch the fabric so there are no
folds or wrinkles, and press the inner frame
into the outer frame.
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet

When you want to embroider the pattern in a
particular place, use the embroidery sheet with the
frame.
a
With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the
fabric you want to embroider.
a Inner frame
b Outer frame
d
Remove the embroidery sheet.
a Embroidery pattern
b Mark
Embroidering E-15
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape

Embroidering Small Fabrics or Secure with double-sided tape or a temporary spray
Fabric Edges adhesive.
Use an embroidery stabilizer to provide extra

support. After embroidering, remove the stabilizer
carefully. Attach the stabilizer as shown in the
following examples. We recommend using a
stabilizer for embroidery.
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch. a Ribbon or tape
b Stabilizer
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners

Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
E-16
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME

E
Note
• Wind and insert the bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame. 1
Embroidery
a d
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to Lower the frame-securing lever to be level
raise the presser foot. with the frame to secure the embroidery
frame in the embroidery frame holder.
b
Align the embroidery frame guide with the
right edge of the embroidery frame holder.
a Frame-securing lever
a Embroidery frame holder

b Embroidery frame guide
CAUTION
c
Slide the embroidery frame into the holder, • If the frame-securing lever is not lowered, the
following message appears. You cannot start
making sure to align the embroidery frame’s sewing until you lower the frame-securing
with the holder’s . lever.
a Arrow mark
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame
a
Raise the frame-securing lever.
Embroidering E-17
b
Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
E-18
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION

E
The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be
repositioned for better placement on the garment, you can check the layout before starting embroidery.
1
Embroidery
Checking the Pattern Position b
From , press the key for the position
that you want to check.

The embroidery frame moves and shows the
pattern position. Watch the frame closely to make
sure the pattern will be sewn in the right place.
a
Press .
a Selected position
→ The needle will move to the selected position on the
pattern.
Memo
• To see the entire embroidering area, press
→ The following screen is displayed. . The embroidery frame moves and
shows the embroidery area.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle is up when the
embroidery frame is moving. If the needle is
down, it could break and result in injury.
c
Press .
Embroidering E-19
■ Frame sizes displayed on screen

Previewing the Completed
Pattern Icon Name
Embroidering area
Extra large embroidery frame
a
Press .
H 300 mm × W 180 mm
Large embroidery frame
H 180 mm × W 130 mm
Medium embroidery frame (optional)
→ An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered H 100 mm × W 100 mm

appears. (H 4 inches × W 4 inches)
Small embroidery frame (optional)
b
Press to select the frame
H 20 mm × W 60 mm
used in the preview. (H 1 inch × W 2-1/2 inches)
* Frames displayed in light gray cannot be selected.
* Press to enlarge the image of the pattern.
Memo
* The pattern can be sewn as it appears in the
• You can begin sewing from this screen by
following display.
pressing the “Start/Stop” button.
a
E-20
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

E
Embroidering Attractive Finishes
There are many factors that go into beautiful embroidery. Using the appropriate stabilizer (see page E-11)
1
and hooping the fabric in the frame (see page E-13) are two important factors mentioned earlier. Another
Embroidery
important point is the appropriateness of the needle and thread being used. See the explanation of threads
below.
Thread Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for use with this machine.
Other embroidery threads may not yield optimum results.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread intended for use with this machine.
Memo
• If you use threads other than those listed above, the embroidery may not sew out correctly.
Included bobbin case varies depending on the model of machine. See explanation below to understand
the different bobbin cases.
Bobbin case (recommended for Standard bobbin case originally installed in the machine has a green marking on the screw. We
sewing and for embroidering with recommend using the included embroidery bobbin thread with this bobbin case. Do not adjust the
included 60 weight bobbin thread) tension screw on this bobbin case with the green marked screw.
a Standard bobbin case

(green marking on the screw)
Bobbin case (for prewound or other The bobbin case with no color on the screw is set with tighter tension for embroidery with different
embroidery bobbin threads) weights of bobbin threads and a variety of embroidery techniques. This bobbin case is identified
with a dark colored mark on the inside of the bobbin cavity. The tension screw on this case can be
adjusted if necessary (see page E-31).
a Bobbin case (no color on the

screw)
See “Cleaning the Race” of “Appendix” for how to remove the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric
hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely and the embroidery frame may
strike the needle, causing the needle to bend or break and possibly cause injury.
Place the fabric so that it does not hang off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from dragging.
Note
• Before embroidering, check that there is enough thread in the bobbin. If you start to sew your
embroidery project without enough thread in the bobbin, you will need to rewind the bobbin in the
middle of the embroidery pattern.
• Do not leave objects in the range of motion of the embroidery frame. The frame may strike the object
and cause a poor finish to the embroidery pattern.
• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric
hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely, and the pattern may not turn
out as planned.
Embroidering E-21
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover

Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some
looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the
included embroidery needle plate cover to the
needle plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two Example:
projections on the underside of the cover into the
notches on the needle plate as shown below.
b
a
a Groove
b Projection
c Notch
To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place
your fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.
CAUTION
• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far a Embroidery color order
as possible to attach it. If the embroidery b Cursor
needle plate cover is not securely attached, it
may cause the needle to break. Memo
• The [+] cursor moves over the pattern,
showing which part of the pattern is being
Note sewn.
• Do not use the embroidery needle plate
a
cover for any applications other than Thread the machine with thread for the first
embroidery.
color, pass the thread through the hole in
embroidery foot, pull out some thread to
give it some slack, and then lightly hold the
end of the thread in your left hand.
E-22
b f
Lower the presser foot, then press the Repeat the same steps for embroidering the
“Start/Stop” button to start embroidering. remaining colors.
After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”
button again to stop the machine.
E
c
Trim the excess thread at the end of the
seam. If the end of the seam is under the
1
presser foot, raise the presser foot, then
Embroidery
trim the excess thread.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start → When the last color is sewn, “Finished sewing” will
embroidering. appear on the display. Press , and the display
→ When the first color is completely sewn, the machine will return to the original screen.
will automatically trim the threads and stop. The
presser foot will then automatically be raised. Memo
On the embroidery color order display, the next • The Thread Trimming Function is originally
color will move to the top. set to trim excess thread jumps (threads
linking parts of the pattern, etc.). Depending
Memo on the type of thread and fabric that are
• If there is thread left over from the beginning used, an end of upper thread may remain
of sewing, it may be sewn over as you on the surface of the fabric at the beginning
continue embroidering the pattern, making of the stitching. After embroidering is
it very difficult to deal with the thread after finished, cut off this excess thread.
the pattern is finished. Trim the threads at If the setting has been turned off, trim the
the beginning of each thread change. excess thread jumps using scissors after
the pattern is finished.
e
Remove the thread for the first color from See page E-32 for information on the thread
the machine. Thread the machine with the trimming function.
next color.
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
Which Use Appliqué
There are some patterns which call for an appliqué
inside the pattern. Prepare the base fabric and the
appliqué fabric (appliqué piece).
When sewing an embroidery pattern with an
appliqué, the color sewing order display shows
“APPLIQUE MATERIAL”, “APPLIQUE POSITION”,
“APPLIQUE”, and then the sewing order of the
colors around the appliqué.
Memo
• Depending on the thread color display
setting, the display may show ,
, or .
Embroidering E-23
a d
Attach an iron-on stabilizer to the wrong Place the base material into the embroidery
side of the appliqué material. frame.
a Appliqué material (cotton, felt, etc.)

b Iron-on stabilizer
a Base material
b
Place the appliqué material into the
e
embroidery frame, and then press the Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew the
“Start/Stop” button to sew the outline of position of the appliqué.
the appliqué. * Use the same thread color you plan to use when
attaching the appliqué in step g.
a Outline of appliqué
b Appliqué material a Position of appliqué
b Base material
Memo → The machine will sew around the position of the
• The embroidery procedure is the same as appliqué and will then stop.
the basic procedure explained on
f
page E-22. Apply a thin layer of adhesive or spray
adhesive to the back of the appliqué piece
→ The machine will sew around the outline of the and attach it to the appliqué position so that
appliqué pieces and will then stop. it follows the seam of the outline.
c
Remove the appliqué material from the
embroidery frame, and then cut carefully
along the stitching. After cutting, remove all
of the stitching thread carefully.
* Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline you just
sewed. Do not cut inside the stitching line, as the
appliqué fabric will not be caught by the appliqué
stitch.
Memo
• If the appliqué material is a lightweight
fabric, you may want to use a fusible web
on the back to stabilize the fabric and for
appliqué placement. Fuse appliqué in place
with an iron.
Do not remove fabric from the frame to iron
the appliqué material.
E-24
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
E
1
Embroidery
Memo
• Some patterns may not show all three
appliqué steps. Sometimes the
“APPLIQUE” step will be shown as a color.
→ The appliqué will then be completed.
h
Change the upper thread and then carry out
the rest of the embroidering.
Memo
• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,
needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish
embroidering the appliqué pattern and then
clean away the glue.
• For best sewing results clip all threads
between color steps.
Embroidering E-25
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

Note
• Be careful not to bump the embroidery unit carriage or the presser foot when removing or attaching
the embroidery frame. Otherwise, the pattern will not embroider correctly.
b
Unlock the frame-securing lever and
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread remove the embroidery frame.
* Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at
When the bobbin begins to run out of thread this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
during embroidering, the machine will stop and frame.
the message below will appear. Press and
follow the directions below to rethread the lower
threading. If very little sewing remains, you can
embroider 10 final stitches without rethreading the
machine by pressing . The machine will stop
after sewing the 10 stitches.
c
Insert a wound bobbin into the machine
(see “Setting the Bobbin” of “Basic
operations”).
Note
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” in the
settings screen of the machine setting
mode is set to “OFF”, the message shown
above does not appear.
a
Press .
d
Press .
→ After the thread is automatically cut, the carriage

will move.
→ The carriage will return to its original position.
e
Attach the embroidery frame.
f
To return to the spot in the pattern where
you stopped sewing, follow steps c
through f in the next section.
E-26
d
Press , , , or to move
If the Thread Breaks During
the needle back the correct number of
Sewing stitches before the spot where the thread E
1
broke.
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the * If you cannot move back to the spot where the
machine.
thread broke, press to select the color and
Embroidery
If the upper thread is broken, redo the move to the beginning position of that color, then
upper threading. If the bobbin thread is use , , , or to move ahead

to slightly before where the thread broke.
broken, press and follow the
directions in steps a through e from the
previous section to reset the bobbin.
c
Press .
e
f
lower the presser foot, and press the
“Start/Stop” button to continue sewing.
Embroidering E-27
Restarting from the Beginning Resuming Embroidery After

Turning Off the Power
a
Press .
The current color and stitch number are saved
when embroidery is stopped. The next time the
machine is turned on, you have the option to
continue or delete the pattern.
Memo
• Even if the power goes out in the middle of
embroidery, the machine returns to the
point where embroidery was stopped when
the machine is turned on again.
b
Press .
a Current stitch number when embroidery was

stopped
Note
• Do not remove the embroidery unit or the
memory will no longer remember your
design.
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Follow the instructions shown on the screen
→ The embroidery frame moves, returning the needle
and remove the embroidery frame.
to the pattern’s beginning position.
→ The following message will appear.
c
lower the presser foot and start sewing.
E-28
c
Attach the embroidery frame and press
.
E
1
Embroidery
→ The previous embroidery screen displayed before
the machine was turned off appears.
Memo
• If you want to start a new embroidery
pattern, press so the pattern
selection screen appears.
d
Continue embroidering.
a Stitch number when embroidery is resumed
Embroidering E-29
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
a
Press .
Adjusting Thread Tension
When embroidering, the thread tension should be
set so that the upper thread can slightly be seen on
■ Correct Thread Tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the
fabric. If the thread tension is not set correctly, the
pattern will not finish well. The fabric may pucker or
the thread may break.
a Right side
b Wrong side
Follow the operations described below to adjust
thread tension according to the situation.
b
Note Press to weaken the upper thread
• If the thread tension setting is made tension. (The tension number will
extremely weak, the machine may stop
during sewing. This is not the sign of a
decrease.)
malfunction. Increase the thread tension
slightly, and begin sewing again.
Memo
• If you turn the main power to OFF or select
c
a different pattern, the thread tension will Press .
reset to the automatic setting.
• When you retrieve a saved pattern, the ■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
thread tension setting will be the same as
when the pattern was saved. The tension of the upper thread is too loose,
resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread locks,
or loops appearing on the right side of the fabric.
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting Note
in the bobbin thread being visible from the right side • If the upper thread was incorrectly
of the fabric. threaded, the upper thread may be too
loose. In this case, refer to “Upper
Note Threading” of “Basic operations” and
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly rethread the upper thread.
threaded, the upper thread may be too
tight. In this case, refer to “Setting the
Bobbin” of “Basic operations” and rethread
the bobbin thread.
a Right side
b Wrong side
a
Press .
a Right side
b Wrong side
E-30
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery

b
Press to tighten the upper thread
function, using the bobbin case (with no color on
tension. (The tension number will increase.) the screw), turn the slotted-head screw (-) with a
(small) screwdriver. E
1
Embroidery
c
Press .
a Do not turn a phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
Note ■ Correct Tension
• With “Embroidery Tension” on the setting
screen, the tension of the upper thread can Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of
be adjusted for embroidering. The selected fabric.
setting will be applied to all patterns.
When embroidering, if the overall tension of
the upper thread is too tight or too loose,
adjust it from the setting screen. Press
to tighten the upper thread tension and a Right side
press to loosen the upper tension. If an b Wrong side
individual embroidery pattern needs ■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose
additional fine tuning, refer to “Adjusting
Thread Tension” on page E-30. Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of
fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-)

clockwise, being careful not to over-tighten the
screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to increase
bobbin tension.
Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with

No Color on the Screw)
The bobbin case (with no color on the screw) can
be adjusted when bobbin tension changes are
required to accommodate different bobbin
threads. See “Embroidering Attractive Finishes” on
page E-21.
Embroidering E-31
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight

a
Press .
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be
lifting/looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the
wrong side of fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-)

counterclockwise, being careful not to over-loosen
the screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to decrease
bobbin tension.
b
Press to turn off the automatic thread
CAUTION
• When adjusting the bobbin case, be sure to
cutting function.
remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.

screw on the bobbin case as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it
unusable.
→ The key will display as
• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn,
do not use force. Turning the screw too much * When one color thread is sewn, the machine will
or providing force in either (rotational) stop without cutting the thread.
direction may cause damage to the bobbin
case. Should damage occur, the bobbin case Using the Thread Trimming
may not maintain proper tension.
Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)
Using the Automatic Thread The thread trimming function will
Cutting Function automatically trim any excess thread jumps within
the color. This function is initially turned on. To
(END COLOR TRIM)
turn this function off, press key and then
The automatic thread cutting function will cut . This function can be turned on or off during
the thread at the end of sewing each color. This embroidering.
function is initially turned on. To turn this function * Your customized setting remains after turning the
off, press key and then . This function can machine off and on.
be turned on or off during embroidering.
* This setting returns to its default
when the machine is turned off.
a Jump stitch
E-32
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch

Note
• When this function is turned on, use the
Not to Trim
included ball point needle 75/11 for When the thread trimming function is turned
E
1
embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters. Using on, you can select the length of the jump stitch not
other needles may cause the thread to to trim the thread. This function can be turned on or
break. off during embroidering.
Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm
Embroidery
increments.
a
Press .
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
Press or to select the length of jump stitch.
For example: Press to select 25 mm (1 inch)

and the machine will not trim a jump stitch of 25
mm or less before moving to the next stitching.
Note
• If design has many trims it is recommended
to select a higher jump stitch trim setting in
order to reduce the amount of excess tails
on backside of fabric.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length
selected, the fewer number of times the
machine will trim. In this case, more jump
b
Press to turn off the thread trimming stitches remain on the surface of the fabric.
function.
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed
a
Press .
→ The key will display as

b
* The machine will not trim the thread before moving
In the “Max Embroidery Speed” display, use
to the next stitching.
to change the maximum
embroidery speed.
* You can choose from 3 different speed levels, 350
spm, 600 spm or 1050 spm.
Embroidering E-33
c
When the thread number #123 is
Memo
• “spm” is the number of stitches sewn in one displayed, use to select from six
minute.
embroidery thread brands pictured below.
• Decrease the sewing speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy
fabrics.
• The sewing speed can be changed after an
embroidery has been started.
• The maximum sewing speed setting does
not change until a new setting is selected.
The setting specified before the main power
is set to OFF remains selected the next time
that the machine is turned on.
• Decrease the sewing speed to 600 spm
when using a speciality thread like a
metallic thread.
• While selecting the bobbin work pattern, the
embroidery speed recommendation is set at
“100 spm”; however you can choose from
100 spm, 200 spm, or 350 spm. MADEIRA /POLYESTER
THREAD#
c
Press .
MADEIRA RAYON THREAD#
Changing the Thread Color
Display
SULKY THREAD#
You can display the name of the thread colors or
embroidery thread number.
Memo ROBISON-ANTON/POLYESTER
• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from THREAD#
actual spool colors.
a
Press . EMBROIDERY / POLYESTER
THREAD#
b
In the “Thread Color Display”, use
COUNTRY/COTTON THREAD#*
to display the name of the thread colors or
the embroidery thread number.
* Depending on the country or area, cotton-like

polyester thread is sold.
d
Press .
E-34
Changing the “Embroidery Frame

Display” E
a
Press . 1
b
Embroidery
In the “Embroidery Frame Display”, use
to change the embroidery frame display

mode.
* There are 16 choices.
* Optional embroidery frames

a Extra large frame embroidering area
30 cm × 18 cm (12 inches × 7 inches)
b Center mark
c Large frame embroidering area
d Embroidering area for optional border embroidery
frame
e Embroidery area for optional quilt embroidery
frame
f Medium frame embroidering area
g Embroidery area for optional small embroidery
frame
2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
h Embroidery area for optional border embroidery
frame
i Grid lines
c
Press .
Embroidering E-35
REVISING THE PATTERN
CAUTION
• When you have revised the pattern, check the display of available embroidery frames and use an
appropriate frame. If you use an embroidery frame not displayed as available for use, the presser foot may
strike the frame and possibly cause injury.
Moving the Pattern
Use to move the pattern in the direction

shown by the arrow.
Press to center the pattern.
Aligning the Pattern and the

Needle
a Distance from the center Example: Aligning the lower left side of a
The pattern can also be moved by dragging it. pattern and the needle
If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to
position the pointer on the desired pattern, and
then select and drag the pattern. The pattern can
also be dragged by selecting it directly in the
screen with your finger or the touch pen.
Memo
• Patterns cannot be moved in screens where
does not appear.
E-36
a
Mark the embroidery start position on the
d
Press .
fabric, as shown.
E
e
1
Use to align the needle and the mark
on the fabric, and begin embroidering the
pattern.
Embroidery
b
Press .
Changing the Size of the Pattern
a
Press .
c
Press .
a
b
b
Select the direction in which to change the
a Start position
size.
b This key is used for aligning linked characters (see
* Press to enlarge the pattern proportionately.
page E-41).
→ The needle position moves to the bottom left corner
* Press to shrink the pattern proportionately.
of the pattern (the embroidery frame moves so that
the needle is positioned correctly).
* Press to stretch the pattern horizontally.
* Press to compact the pattern horizontally.
* Press to stretch the pattern vertically.
* Press to compact the pattern vertically.
* Press to return the pattern to its original

appearance.
Embroidering E-37
Rotating the Pattern

a
a
Press .
a Size of the pattern
b
Select the angle of rotation for the pattern.
* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the

Memo
• Some patterns or characters can be left.
enlarged more than others. * Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
• Some patterns or characters can be
right.
enlarged to a greater degree if they are
rotated 90 degrees. * Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
• You can change the size of the pattern by left.
rotating the mouse wheel. Rotate the
mouse wheel away from you to shrink the * Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
pattern. Rotate the mouse wheel toward right.
you to enlarge the pattern.
* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the left.
c
Press to return to the original screen. * Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the
right.
position.
E-38
Creating a Horizontal Mirror

Image E
Press so it appears as to create a
horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern.
1
Embroidery
Press again to return the pattern to normal.
a Degree of rotation
0°
Memo
• You can rotate the pattern by rotating the
mouse wheel. Rotate the mouse wheel
away from you to rotate the pattern 10
degrees to the left. Rotate the mouse wheel
toward you to rotate the pattern 10 degrees
to the right.
c
Enlarging the Editing Screen
Enlarge the editing screen by pressing .
Press to close the enlarged screen.
Embroidering E-39
Changing the Density

(Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only)
The thread density for some alphabet character
and frame patterns can be changed.
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5% a Normal
increments can be specified. b Fine (stitches closer together)
c Coarse (stitches farther apart)
a
Press . → The pattern density changes each time you press a
button.
* Press to display all the function keys on the
c
screen. Press to return to the pattern
selection screen.
Changing the Colors of Alphabet

Character Patterns
Combined alphabet character patterns can be
sewn with each letter in a different color. If
“MULTI COLOR” is set, the machine stops after
each character is sewn so that the thread can be
changed to a different color.
a
Press so that it appears as .

screen.
* Press the key again to return to the original setting.
b
Change the density.
* Press to make the pattern less dense.
* Press to make the pattern more dense.
E-40
b
After a character is sewn, change the thread
b
Press .
color, and then sew the next character.
E
1
Embroidery
c
Embroidering Linked Characters Press .
Follow the procedure described below to

embroider linked characters in a single row when
the entire pattern extends beyond the embroidery
frame.
Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters
“ABC”
a
Select the character patterns for “ABC”.
Note
• For details on selecting character patterns,
refer to “Selecting Character Patterns” on
page E-5.
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
Note
• To cancel the starting point setting and
return the starting point to the center of the
pattern, press .
• Use to select a different starting
point for embroidering.
Embroidering E-41
h
After the characters are embroidered, cut
d
Press .
the threads to a generous length, remove
the embroidery frame, and then attach the
e
Press . embroidery frame again so that the
remaining characters (“DEF”) can be
embroidered.
a End of the embroidering
i
As in step a, select the character patterns
for “DEF”.
j
Press .
f
Press to turn off the thread cutting
k
Press .
function and then press .
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of

the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button. needle is positioned correctly.
l
Press .
E-42
m
Use to align the needle with the end
of embroidering for the previous pattern. E
1
Embroidery
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering the remaining character
patterns.
→ The thread color displayed on the screen will be
grayed out.
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Monochrome - Using a Single
Color)
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color
instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate
but not stop between color steps, and then
continue till the pattern is completed. Press Memo
for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the
• Even if uninterrupted embroidering has
selected pattern will embroider in a single color,
instead of changing the thread while been set, the automatic thread cutting
function and the thread trimming function
embroidering. Press again to return to the can be used (see page E-32).
pattern’s original settings.
screen.
Embroidering E-43

Embroidery Data Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using embroidery data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
CAUTION
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when
sewing with a stitch density that is too fine or when sewing three or more overlapping stitches. In that
case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used

• Only .pes, .phc, and .dst embroidery data files can be used with this machine. Using data other than that
saved using our data design systems or machines may cause the embroidery machine to malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only.
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
• Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• XD-Picture Card
Note
• The processing speed may vary by quantity of data stored.
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB devices/media, and it will take about 5 to 6
seconds to recognize the devices/media. (Time will differ depending on the USB device/media).
Memo
• To create file folders, use a computer.
• Letters and numerals can be used in the file names. In addition, if the file name contains no more than
eight characters, the entire file name will appear on the screen.
If the file name is more than eight characters long, only the first six characters followed by “~” and a
number appear as the file name.
E-44
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be

Used
• Compatible models: E
1
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
Embroidery
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the embroidery data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains
special characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We
recommend using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and
“_”.
• If embroidery data larger than 30 cm × 18 cm (approx.12 inches × 7 inches) is selected, a message is shown
asking if you wish to rotate the pattern 90 degrees.
Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery data larger than 30 cm × 18 cm (approx.
12 inches × 7 inches) cannot be used.
(All designs must be within the 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) design field size.)
• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the number of colors exceeding the specified limits cannot be
displayed. The combined design can not exceed a maximum number of 500,000 stitches or a maximum
number of 125 color changes (Above numbers are approximate, depending on the overall size of the design).
Use one of our design software programs to edit the embroidery pattern so that it meets these specifications.
• Embroidery data stored in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If embroidery data is stored in a folder in
“Removable Disk”, that embroidery data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
• Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the machine will recognize embroidery data.
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data
• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by file name (the actual image cannot be displayed). Only the
first eight characters of the file name can be displayed.
• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default
thread color sequence. Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
Embroidering E-45
b
Press .
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the
Machine’s Memory * Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
You can save embroidery patterns that you have
customized and will use often; for example, your
name, patterns that have been rotated or had the
size changed, patterns that have had the sewing
position changed, etc. A total of about 2 MB of
patterns can be saved in the machine's memory.
Note
automatically.
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose ■ If the Memory is Full
the pattern you are saving.
If the screen below displays, either the maximum
number of patterns have been saved or the pattern
Memo you want to save takes a lot of memory, and the
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to machine cannot save it. If you delete a previously
the machine’s memory. saved pattern, you can save the current pattern.
• See page E-49 for information on retrieving
a
a saved pattern. Press .
a
Press when the pattern you want to * Press to return to the original screen without
save is in the embroidery screen. saving.
→ The machine displays the patterns currently saved.
E-46
b
Select the pattern you want to delete.
Saving Embroidery Patterns to
USB Media E
When sending embroidery patterns from the
machine to USB media, plug the USB media into
the machine’s USB port.
1
Embroidery
Memo
• USB media is commercially available, but
c
Press . some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
more details.
used, either directly plug the USB device
a
USB media Reader/Writer into the
b
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time except while saving or deleting a
pattern.
a Amount of memory used by the pattern to be

a
deleted Press when the pattern you want to
b Amount of memory needed to save the current save is in the embroidery screen.
pattern
d
Press .
* If you decide not to delete the pattern, press .
→ The “Saving” screen displays. When the pattern is

saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Note
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
Memo
• If there is enough memory available after
deleting the pattern, the pattern you want to
save will be saved automatically. If there is
not enough memory available after deleting
the pattern, repeat the steps above to
delete another pattern from the machine’s
memory.
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern.
• See page E-49 for more information about
retrieving saved patterns.
Embroidering E-47
b
the machine. Saving Embroidery Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the
embroidery patterns can be temporarily retrieved
from and saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in
your computer. A total of about 3 MB of
embroidery patterns can be saved in the
“Removable Disk”, but the saved embroidery
patterns are deleted when the machine is turned
OFF.
Note
a USB port • Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
b USB media
a
Note Plug the USB cable connector into the
• The processing speed may vary by quantity corresponding USB ports for the computer
of data.
and for the machine.
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB
b
Turn on your computer and select
media are inserted, only the USB media
inserted first is detected. “Computer (My computer)”.
• Do not insert anything other than USB * The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
media into the USB media port. Otherwise, on the computer and embroidery machine whether
the USB media drive may be damaged. or not they are turned on.
c
Press .

saving.

automatically.
Note a USB port for computer

• Do not insert or remove USB media while b USB cable connector
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose → The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
some or all of the pattern you are saving. “Computer (My computer)” on the computer.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
insert it with force. Check the orientation of
the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
E-48
c
Press when the pattern you want to
Retrieving Patterns from the
save is in the embroidery screen.
Machine’s Memory E
a
Press . 1
Embroidery
→ The machine displays the patterns currently in the
d
Press . memory.
b
* Press to return to the original screen without retrieve.
saving.
→ The pattern will be temporarily saved to

“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
computer)”.
e
Select the pattern’s .phc file in “Removable
Disk” and copy the file to the computer.
c
Press .
Embroidering E-49
Recalling from USB Media a

b
You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from
either direct USB media or a folder in the USB
media. If the pattern is in a folder, check each
folder to find the embroidery pattern.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by quantity
of data.
c
a
the machine (see page E-47).
a Folder name
b Embroidery patterns in USB media
c Path
* The path shows the current folder at the top of the
list.
Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder
are displayed.
* Press to return to the previous folder.
* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
a USB port
d
b USB media Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
b
Press .
e
Press .
* Press to delete the pattern. The pattern will be

deleted from the USB media.
→ Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are

displayed.
c
Press when there is a subfolder to
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
media, the embroidery pattern in the
subfolder is displayed.

recalling. → The embroidery screen is displayed.
E-50
d
Press .
Recalling from the Computer
E
a
1
and for the machine (see page E-48).
b
On the computer, open “Computer (My
Embroidery
computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
→ The patterns in the computer are displayed on the

selection screen.
e
recall.
c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.
f
Press .
→ Pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to the

machine.
Note
• While data is being written, do not → The embroidery screen is displayed.
disconnect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
Embroidering E-51
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
c
Apply a thin layer of fabric glue or a
Using a Frame Pattern to Make temporary spray adhesive to the rear of the
appliqué created in step a. Attach the
an Appliqué (1) appliqué to the base fabric matching the
shapes.
You can use framed patterns of the same size and
shape to create an appliqué. Embroider one
pattern with a straight stitch and one pattern with a
satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern.
Embroider the pattern onto the appliqué
material, then cut neatly around the outside
of the shape.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué. Embroider over
the appliqué and base fabric from step c to
create the appliqué.
Note
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a • If you change the size or position of the
patterns when selecting them, make a note
onto the base fabric. of the size and location.
E-52
d
Remove the embroidery frame from the
Using a Frame Pattern to Make embroidery unit, and cut around the
outside of the stitches.
an Appliqué (2) E
This is a second method to make appliqué using
embroidery patterns. You do not have to change
the fabric in the embroidery frame using this
1
method. Embroider one pattern with a straight
Embroidery
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and
embroider the pattern onto the base fabric.
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the
embroidery frame to cut it. Also, do not pull
or push on the fabric. Otherwise, the fabric
may loosen in the frame.
e
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué.
b
Place the appliqué fabric over the pattern
embroidered in step a.
* Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers
the stitched line.
Note
• Do not change the size or position of the
pattern.
• If you change the size or position of the
patterns when selecting them, make a note
of the size and location.
c
Embroider the same pattern on the appliqué
fabric.
Embroidering E-53
f a
Reattach the embroidery frame to the Connect to the machine the media
embroidery unit, and embroider the satin containing the created split embroidery
stitch pattern to create an appliqué. pattern, and then select the split
embroidery pattern to be embroidered.
* For details on recalling patterns, refer to “Selecting
Patterns from Embroidery Cards” on page E-7,
“Recalling from USB Media” on page E-50, or
“Recalling from the Computer” on page E-51.
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns

Split embroidery patterns created with Palette
Ver.7 or later can be sewn. With split embroidery
patterns, embroidery designs larger than the
embroidery hoop are divided into multiple
sections, which combine to create a single pattern
after each section is sewn.
For details on creating split embroidery patterns
and for more detailed sewing instructions, refer to
the Instruction manual included with Palette Ver.7
or later. → A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
The following procedure describes how to read
the split embroidery pattern shown below from
b
USB media and embroider it. Select section to be embroidered.
* Select the sections in alphabetical order.

* A maximum of 12 sections can be displayed in one
page. If there are 13 or more sections in the pattern,
press or to display the previous or next
page.
E-54
c e
Press . Press the “Start/Stop” button to embroider
the pattern section.
f
When embroidering is finished, the E
following screen appears. Press .
1
Embroidery
→ A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
g
Repeat steps b through f to embroider
the remaining sections of the pattern.
d
If necessary, edit the pattern.
* For details, refer to “REVISING THE PATTERN” on

page E-36.
Memo
• The pattern can be rotated 90° to either the
left or right when is pressed.
Embroidering E-55
EEmbroidering
Chapter 2
Embroidery Edit
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS............................. 57
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT ............................. 58

Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral
Alphabet Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work Patterns ......................59
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns......................................59
EDITING PATTERNS ................................................ 61
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 62
Moving the Pattern ..................................................................63
Rotating the Pattern..................................................................63
Changing the Size of the Pattern...............................................63
Deleting the Pattern .................................................................63
Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200% .............63
Changing the Configuration of Character Patterns ...................64
Changing Character Spacing .....................................................64
Reducing Character Spacing .....................................................65
Separating Combined Character Patterns .................................65
Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern ...66
Embroidering Linked Characters ...............................................67
Changing the Thread Color ......................................................67
Creating a Custom Thread Table...............................................68
■ Adding a Color to the Custom Thread Table from the List ....... 69
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to USB media ....................... 70
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table data from USB media ....... 71
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table .....................72
Designing Repeated Patterns ....................................................73
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns ........................................................ 73
■ Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern......................... 74
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns .............................................. 75
■ Assigning Thread Marks ........................................................... 76
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly .......................................77
Duplicating a Pattern................................................................79
After Editing..............................................................................79
COMBINING PATTERNS ......................................... 80
Editing Combined Patterns........................................................80
■ Selecting combined embroidery patterns ................................. 82
Sewing Combined Patterns .......................................................83
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ............... 84
(Monochrome - Using a Single Color).......................................84
Basting Embroidery...................................................................84

EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
E
With the “Embroidery Edit” functions, you can combine embroidery patterns and character patterns,
change the size of patterns, rotate patterns, and perform many other editing functions. This machine can
perform the 9 functions listed below. 2
■ Combine Patterns
Embroidery Edit
You can easily create combinations of embroidery patterns, frame patterns, character patterns, patterns from the
machine’s memory, patterns from separately sold embroidery cards, and many other patterns.
■ Move Patterns
Within the 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) wide embroidery area, you can change the position of
patterns, and check the position on the LCD.
■ Rotate Patterns
You can rotate patterns one degree, ten degrees or ninety degrees at a time.
■ Enlarge or Reduce Patterns

You can make patterns larger or smaller.
• This function is not available for some patterns.
■ Create Mirror Images

You can create horizontal mirror images.
• This function is not available for some patterns.
■ Change Alphabet Character Spacing

You can increase or decrease the spacing between characters in combined patterns.
■ Change Alphabet Character Appearance/Layout

You can change the layout of the characters to a curved line, diagonal, etc. There are 6 choices total.
■ Change the Thread Colors of Patterns

You can change the thread colors of the pattern to your favorite colors.
■ Creating a Repeating Pattern

You can add copies of a pattern to create a pattern that repeats in a vertical or horizontal direction.
Embroidering E-57
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

Prepare the machine for embroidery according to the instructions on “BEFORE EMBROIDERING” of
“Basic operations”, and press , then / to display the screen below.
a b
c d
e
f
g h
i
a Baby Lock “Exclusives”

b Embroidery patterns
c Floral alphabet patterns
d Frame patterns
e Character patterns
f Bobbin work patterns (see page E-92)
g Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page E-49)
h Patterns saved in USB media (see page E-50)
i Patterns saved on the computer (see page E-51)
j Press this key to position the embroidery unit for storage.
Memo
• See included “Quick Reference Guide” for more information on each category’s selection screen.
Note
(For embroidery and sewing machine only)
• You can also sew Utility Stitches or Character/Decorative Stitches with the embroidery unit attached
by pressing and (a confirmation message for moving the carriage will appear). Attach the
appropriate presser foot before sewing.
E-58
Selecting Embroidery Selecting Alphabet Character

Patterns/Baby Lock Patterns E
“Exclusives”/Floral Alphabet
Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work
When you select character patterns from the
“Embroidery Edit” screen, you can edit the
appearance of the pattern at the same time.
2
Patterns
Embroidery Edit
a
Press .
a
Select the category of the pattern.
* Refer to “CREATING BOBBIN WORK” on page E-92
about the bobbin work patterns.
b
edit.
* See page E-4 and E-7 for more information on
selecting patterns.
→ The pattern is displayed in the top part of the screen.
c
Press .
b
Select the font, then enter the characters.
(Example: A B C)
* See page E-5 for more information about selecting
characters.
→ The pattern selected for editing is outlined in red on

the “Embroidery Edit” display.
d
Proceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on
page E-61 to edit the pattern.
Embroidering E-59
f
After you finish your selections, press
c
Press to change the layout of the
pattern. .
* If the characters are too small to see, press to

view a display of all entered characters.
→ The “Embroidery Edit” screen will appear.
g
Proceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on
page E-61 to edit the pattern.
d
Select the layout. (Example: )
When selecting an arc, use and to

change the degree of the arc.
* Press to make the arc flatter.
* Press to make the arc rounder.
Memo
• When selecting , and
change to and . You can

increase or decrease the incline.
e
E-60
EDITING PATTERNS
EDITING PATTERNS
E
2
d
Embroidery Edit
d
a a
b b
c e c e
a Shows the size of the entire combined pattern.

b Shows the size of the pattern currently selected.
c Shows the distance from the center of the frame.
d Shows the color sequence and times of each step of the pattern currently selected.
e Shows the degree of rotation for the pattern.
Memo
• If a key display is light gray, you cannot use that function with the selected pattern.
Embroidering E-61
EDITING PATTERNS
■ Key Functions
a p
b
c o
n
d
e m
f l
g k
h j
i

a Magnify key Press this key to magnify the pattern by 200% in the screen. E-63
b Thread palette key Press this key to change the colors of the displayed pattern. E-67
c Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, ten E-38
degrees or ninety degrees at a time.
d Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. Patterns can be enlarged or E-37
reduced.
e Array key Press this key to change the configuration of a character pattern. E-64
f Multi color key Press this key to change the color of individual characters in a pattern. E-66
g Character spacing Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. E-64
key
h Add key Press this key to add another pattern to the editing pattern. E-79
i Delete key Press this key to delete the selected pattern (the pattern outlined by the red E-63
box).
j “Embroidery” key Press this key to call up the “Embroidery” screen. E-79
k Pattern select key When a combined pattern is selected, use these keys to select a part of the E-66
pattern to edit.
l Duplicate key Press this key to duplicate a pattern. E-79
m Density key Press this key to change the density of frame patterns or character patterns. E-40
n Horizontal mirror Press this key to make a horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern. E-39
image key
o Border key Press this key to make and edit a repeating pattern. E-73
p Arrow keys Press these keys to move the pattern in the direction indicated by the arrow on E-36
( Center key) the key. (Press to return the pattern to its original position.)
E-62
EDITING PATTERNS
Moving the Pattern Displaying Patterns in the Screen

For details on moving the pattern, refer to “Moving
Magnified by 200% E
the Pattern” on page E-36.
Rotating the Pattern

a
Press . 2
Embroidery Edit
For details on rotating the pattern, refer to
“Rotating the Pattern” on page E-38.
Changing the Size of the Pattern

For details on changing the size of the pattern,
refer to “Changing the Size of the Pattern” on
page E-37.
Deleting the Pattern
Press to delete the pattern from the screen.
→ The pattern is magnified by 200%.
b
Check the displayed pattern.
→ Use to scroll through the display

in any direction.
c
To display the pattern back to the normal
size (100%), press .
Embroidering E-63
EDITING PATTERNS
Changing the Configuration of Changing Character Spacing

Character Patterns
a
Press .
a
Press .
b
Use to change the spacing.
b
Press the key of the layout you want to
embroider. * Press to increase the character spacing.
* See page E-60 for more information about layout
types. * Press to decrease the character spacing.

appearance.
→ The display will show the selected layout.
c
Press .
c
E-64
EDITING PATTERNS
Reducing Character Spacing Separating Combined Character

The spacing between characters can be reduced to
Patterns E
50% of the narrowest character in the group.
Note
Combined character patterns can be separated to
adjust the character spacing or to separately edit
the patterns after all characters have been entered.
2
• It is not recommended to edit data and
Embroidery Edit
a
transfer to other or older version machines. Press .
Same features do not apply in other
machines, so problems may occur.
• Character spacing can be reduced only
when characters are arranged normally on a
straight line.
b
Press .
→ The key appears as .
Embroidering E-65
EDITING PATTERNS
c
Use to select where the pattern is
Changing the Color of Each
to be separated, and then press to Alphabet Character in a Pattern
separate it. For this example, the pattern
will be separated between “T” and “a”.
a
Press so you can assign a thread color
to each character.
Note
• A separated character pattern cannot be
b
combined again. Change the thread to sew each character in
a different color.
d
Use to select a pattern, and
* Press to change the colors in the sewing order.
then use to adjust the character

spacing.
a
a Color for each character
e
Press .
E-66
EDITING PATTERNS
c
Press to choose a new
Embroidering Linked Characters
color from the color palette.
You can embroider linked characters exampled
E
2
* To return to the original color, press . If
below, in a single row when the pattern extends
beyond the embroidery frame. multiple colors have been changed, this command
will return all colors to their original colors.
For details on embroidering linked characters, * You can select colors from the color palette by
refer to “Embroidering Linked Characters” on directly touching the color selection with the touch
Embroidery Edit
page E-41. pen.
Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters * Touch to activate your color palette.
“ABC”
Changing the Thread Color

You can change the thread color by moving the
color to be changed to the top of the sewing order
and selecting a new color from the thread colors in
the machine.
a
In the pattern editing screen, press .
a
a Color palette
→ The selected color appears at the top of the sewing
order.
d
Press .
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
b
Press or to put the color you want
to change at the top of the sewing order.
a 64 Embroidery threads table
→ The display shows the changed colors.
Memo
• To select a color from the Custom Thread
Table, “Choosing a Color from the Custom
Thread Table” on page E-72.
Embroidering E-67
EDITING PATTERNS
b
Use to choose where to
Creating a Custom Thread Table
add a color on the custom thread table.
You can create a custom thread table containing * You can choose colors from the custom thread table
the thread colors that you most often use. You can by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.
select thread colors from the machine’s extensive * You can scroll through 100 colors at a time using
list of thread colors from nine different thread
and on the custom thread table.
brands. You can select any color and move the
color to your custom thread table.
Note
• Some machines may already have an
additional 300 Robison-Anton thread colors a
contained in the custom thread table. 300
Robison-Anton thread colors table data can
be downloaded from our website
“ www.babylock.com ”.
b
a
In the pattern editing screen, press and
then press .
a Custom thread table
b Press to recall the custom thread table

data (See page E-71)
c
Use to select one of the thread
brands in the machine.
E-68
EDITING PATTERNS
f
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
d
Use
thread colors are specified.
to enter a color’s 4-digit number. * To delete a specified color from the palette, select E
2
the color to be deleted, and then press .
* If you make a mistake, press to erase the
entered number, and then enter the correct number. * To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press .
Embroidery Edit
Note
• You can save the created custom thread
table data. Refer to “Saving the Custom
Thread Table to USB media” on page E-70
for the detailed procedure.
g
a Thread brand
e
Press .
■ Adding a Color to the Custom

Thread Table from the List
a
Repeat the previous steps a through c on
b
page E-68.
a
b
Press to display the thread list.
a Thread brand
b Entered thread color number
→ The selected thread color is set in the custom thread
table.
Note
• If is not pressed, the thread color
number will not be changed.
Embroidering E-69
EDITING PATTERNS
a
Press and then press .
c
Use to select a thread color.
b
Set your desired colors in the custom thread
b table according to the procedure in
“Creating a Custom Thread Table” on
page E-68.
c
the machine.
a Thread list
b Thread brand
d
Press .
e
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
* To delete a specified color from the palette, select
the color to be deleted, and then press .
* To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press .
f
Press to return to the original screen. a USB port
b USB media
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to Note

• Two USB media cannot be used with this
USB media machine at the same time. If two USB
You can save a custom thread table data file to USB media are inserted, only the USB media
media. inserted first is detected.
Note
• Custom thread table data can only be saved
to USB media. You cannot save the data in
the machine’s memory or in the computer.
• Custom thread table data is saved as “.pcp”
data file.
E-70
EDITING PATTERNS
d b
Press . Press and then press .
E
2
Embroidery Edit
c
Press .
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is

saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Note
some or all of the data you are saving.
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table

data from USB media
You can recall a custom thread table data from USB
media.
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is
Note loaded to the machine, the display returns to the
• Do not store two or more “.pcp” data file in original screen automatically.
USB media. You can only recall one custom
thread table data at a time. Note
a
Insert the USB media containing the custom “Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
thread table data into the USB port. some or all of the data you are saving.
d
The recalled custom thread table is
displayed on the screen.
a USB port
b USB media
Embroidering E-71
EDITING PATTERNS
c
Press .
Choosing a Color from the
Custom Thread Table
You can select a color from the up to 300 thread
colors you have set in the custom thread table.
a
Press .
a Custom thread change key

→ The custom thread table will appear.
d
Press to choose a new
color from the custom thread table.
* Use and to scroll through the custom
thread table.
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
* Press to return to the original color.
b
Press or to put the color you want * You can choose colors from the custom thread table
to change at the top of the sewing order. by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.
a Custom thread table

→ The display shows the changed colors.
e
Press .
E-72
EDITING PATTERNS
Designing Repeated Patterns

■ Sewing Repeated Patterns
E
Using the border function, you can create stitches
using repeated patterns. You can also adjust the
spacing of the patterns within a repeated pattern
2
stitch.
Embroidery Edit
a
Select a pattern, and then press .
b
b
Press .
d e
a Vertical direction
b Horizontal direction
c Repeating and deleting vertical keys
d Repeating and deleting horizontal keys
e Spacing keys
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
d
Use to repeat the pattern on top and
to repeat the pattern at the bottom.
* To delete the top pattern, press .
c
Select the direction in which the pattern * To delete the bottom pattern, press .
will be repeated.
c e
Embroidering E-73
EDITING PATTERNS
e ■ Repeating One Element of a

Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
* To widen spacing, press .

Repeated Pattern
By using the Cut function, you can select one
* To tighten spacing, press . element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that
single element. This function allows you to design
complex repeated patterns.
a
Choose the direction in which the repeated
pattern will be cut.
* Press to cut horizontally.
* Press to cut vertically.
a Press to change a repeated pattern back to

one single pattern.
Memo
• You can only adjust the spacing of patterns
included in the red frame.
f
Complete repeated patterns by repeating
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
steps c through e. depending on the direction selected.
g b
Press to finish repeating. Use and to select the cut line.
Memo
• When there are two or more patterns, all
patterns will be grouped together as one
pattern in the red frame.
• When changing the direction in which the

pattern will be repeated, all of the patterns
in the red frame will automatically be
grouped as one repeating unit. Press
to change a repeated pattern back to one → The cut line will move.
single pattern. See the following section on
how to repeat one element of a repeated
pattern.
E-74
EDITING PATTERNS
c g
Press . Press to finish repeating.
E
2
Embroidery Edit
→ The repeated pattern will be divided into separate
elements. Note
• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into
d
Press . separate elements, you cannot return to the
original repeated pattern.
• Each element can be edited separately in
e
Use and to select the element to the edit screen. See “Selecting combined
repeat. embroidery patterns” on page E-82.
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns

Press to automatically change the sewing
order of colors in combined border embroidery
patterns so that the same color can be continuously
sewn. This allows you to continue sewing without
repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing
the sewing order manually.
Memo
• In combined stitch patterns that contain two
or more border patterns or other patterns
combined with border patterns, the sewing
order of only the border patterns is
changed.
• When a group of two or more patterns using
border patterns is repeated, the sewing
order is changed so that the same color can
be sewn continuously in each pattern.
f
Repeat the selected element.
Embroidering E-75
EDITING PATTERNS
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press to select the thread mark to be
sewn.
■ Assigning Thread Marks

By sewing thread marks, you can easily align
patterns when embroidering a series. When sewing
is finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the shape
of an arrow will be sewn using the final thread.
When sewing a series of patterns, use the point of
this arrow for positioning the following designs to be
sewn. Memo
• When there are two or more elements, use
Memo and or and to select a
• When repeatedly sewing individual patterns, pattern that you want to assign a thread
thread marks can be sewn around the mark(s) to.
perimeter of the pattern only.
E-76
EDITING PATTERNS
d a
Press . Create the repeated pattern with the thread
mark at the center of the end of the pattern.
* Refer to “Assigning Thread Marks” on page E-76. E
2
Embroidery Edit
Embroidering the Pattern
Repeatedly
b
Press , then .
c
After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidery frame and keep sewing for the next embroidering.
pattern.
→ When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is
sewn with the last thread color.
Memo * The thread mark sewn indicates the positioning
• The optional border frame allows you to point for the next embroidery.
easily rehoop the fabric without removing
the embroidery frame from the machine.
d
Remove the embroidery frame.
Embroidering E-77
EDITING PATTERNS
e g
Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame. Touch to set the starting point to the
center top of the pattern.
Note
• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the
embroidering area for the next pattern is
within the embroidering area of the
embroidery sheet.
h
Touch .
a Pattern embroidered first
b Position of pattern to be embroidered next
i
Press the positioning keys to move the
c Embroidering area of embroidery sheet
embroidery frame until the starting point is
aligned with the thread mark on the fabric.
f
Attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then touch .
a Positioning keys
* Press to check the embroidering position.
j
Remove the thread mark.
k
embroidering.
E-78
EDITING PATTERNS
Duplicating a Pattern After Editing

E
a
2
Press .
a
Press .
Embroidery Edit
→ The duplicate is positioned over the original pattern.
* To combine the pattern with other patterns, select
(see page E-80).
* See page E-21 for more information about sewing
patterns.
Memo
a • If you want to return to the edit screen after
pressing , press .
a Duplicated pattern
Note
• If multiple patterns are displayed in the
screen, only the pattern selected using
and is duplicated.
• Move and edit each duplicated pattern
individually.
Embroidering E-79
COMBINING PATTERNS
COMBINING PATTERNS
b
Select .
Editing Combined Patterns
Example: Combining alphabet characters
with an embroidery pattern and
editing
a
Press to select an embroidery
c
pattern. Press .
E-80
COMBINING PATTERNS
d f
Press . Select and enter “Flower”.
* After selecting , press to change the
character case, then enter the remaining characters. E
2
Embroidery Edit
e
Press to enter the alphabet
→ The characters you enter will be displayed in the
characters. center of the display.
g
* Press to return to the previous screen. Press .
h
Use to move the characters.
* With a USB mouse, your finger or the touch pen,

drag the characters to move them.
i
Press to change the layout of the
characters. Press .
* See page E-64 for more information about changing
the layout.
Embroidering E-81
COMBINING PATTERNS
j
Press to change the color of the
characters. Memo
* See page E-67 for more information about changing • Use to select patterns that are
the color.
overlapping and cannot be selected by
clicking them or by touching the screen.
k
When all editing is finished, press .
■ Selecting combined embroidery

patterns
If multiple patterns have been combined, use
to select the pattern to be edited. If a
USB mouse is connected, the pattern can be
selected by clicking it. Move the mouse to position
the pointer over the desired pattern, and then click
the left mouse button. In addition, patterns can be
selected by directly touching the screen with your
finger or touch pen.
E-82
COMBINING PATTERNS
b
Sewing Combined Patterns Embroider .
Combined patterns will be embroidered in the

E
order they were entered. In this example, the
embroidery order will be as follows: 2
Embroidery Edit
→
Note
• Follow the directions in “Sewing Embroidery
Patterns” on page E-22.
a
Embroider by following the
color order on the right side of the display.
→ After the flowers are embroidered, the [+] cursor

will move to the “Flower” part of the pattern.
Embroidering E-83
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS

a
Press .
(Monochrome - Using a Single
b
In the “Embroidery Basting Distance”
Color)
display, use and to specify the
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color distance from the pattern to the basting
instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate stitching.
but not stop between color steps, and then
continue till the pattern is completed. Press
for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the
selected pattern will embroider in a single color,
instead of changing the thread while
embroidering. Press again to return to the
pattern’s original settings. Memo
• The higher the setting, the farther the
basting is from the pattern.
c
Press to return to the previous
screen.
d
Press .
e
Press to select the basting setting.
Basting Embroidery
Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn
along the outline of the pattern. This is useful for
embroidering fabric that cannot have stabilizer
material affixed with an iron or adhesive. By
stitching stabilizer material to the fabric, shrinkage
of the stitching or misaligned pattern can be
minimized.
Note
• It is recommended to finish combining and Note
editing the pattern before selecting the
basting setting. If the pattern is edited after • When is pressed, the pattern is moved
selecting the basting setting, the basting to the center. After selecting the basting
and pattern may become misaligned, and setting, move the pattern to the desired
the basting under the pattern may be position.
difficult to remove after embroidering is
complete.
E-84
g
When embroidering is finished, remove the
Memo basting stitching.
• To cancel the setting, press . E
→ Basting is added to the beginning of the sewing
order. 2
f
Embroidery Edit
embroidering.

In the same way as embroidery patterns in Chapter 1, you can save and retrieve edited embroidery
patterns to and from the machine’s memory, a personal computer, or USB media. Refer to the relevant
sections in Chapter 1 on saving and retrieving embroidery patterns and follow the same procedures in
order to save and retrieve edited embroidery patterns.
See page E-44 for more information about the memory function.
Embroidering E-85
EEmbroidering
Chapter 3
How to Create Bobbin Work
(Embroidery)
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK.......................................... 87
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK........................... 87

Required Materials....................................................................87
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover ................................................. 87
■ Lower thread............................................................................ 87
■ Upper thread ........................................................................... 88
■ Needle ..................................................................................... 88
■ Embroidery foot ....................................................................... 88
■ Fabric ....................................................................................... 88
Upper Threading.......................................................................88
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ....................................................88
■ When tension is applied to the bobbin thread.......................... 90
■ When tension is not applied to the bobbin thread ................... 91
CREATING BOBBIN WORK .................................... 92
Selecting the Pattern.................................................................92
Start Embroidering....................................................................93
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION...................... 96
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension .......................................... 96
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread .............................. 96
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................. 97
■ The thread was accidentally cut automatically and the bobbin
thread is caught inside the machine ......................................... 97
■ Correcting bobbin work tension .............................................. 97
■ The bobbin thread catches on the tension spring
of the bobbin case.................................................................... 97

ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK

E
Beautiful embroidery work, with a three-dimensional appearance, can be created by winding the bobbin
with medium to heavy weight thread or ribbon, which is too thick to be threaded through the machine’s
needle. The decorative thread or ribbon will stitch out on the underneath side of fabric while
embroidering with the fabric wrong side facing up. Bobbin work embroidery is created using the bobbin
3
work patterns included with this machine.
How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)

Refer to the “Quick Reference Guide” about the bobbin work patterns.

■ Lower thread
Required Materials We recommend the following types of threads for
bobbin work.
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover
No.5 or finer hand embroidery

thread or decorative thread
Bobbin case (gray)

There is a notch at the location indicated by the Flexible woven ribbon
letter “A”. (Approx. 2mm (5/64 inch) is
recommended.)
* When wide ribbon or heavy weight threads are being used, we

Bobbin cover recommend test embroidering with the thread through and also
There are two small v-shaped tabs on the back of bypassing the bobbin case tension to see which gives the best
the bobbin cover as indicated by the letter “B”. stitching results.
The tabs help hold the bobbin in place so it does If wide ribbon such as 3.5mm (approx. 1/8 inch) is to be used,
not lift up while thick thread is being pulled we recommend that bobbin case tension not be applied. Refer
through. to page E-91 for more detailed instructions.
Note
• Do not use thread heavier than No.5 hand
embroidery thread.
• Some threads may not be appropriate for
bobbin work. Be sure to sew trial stitches
before sewing on your project.
Embroidering E-87
■ Upper thread
Embroidery thread (polyester thread) or
Preparing the Bobbin Thread
monofilament (transparent nylon) thread.
If you do not wish for the upper thread to be visible, In order to create bobbin work, the bobbin case
we recommend using transparent nylon must be replaced with the one for bobbin work.
monofilament thread or polyester light weight Before creating bobbin work, clean the bobbin case
thread (50wt. or above) that is the same color as the and the race.
lower thread.
a
Raise the needle and embroidery foot, and
■ Needle then turn off the machine.
Use a needle appropriate for the upper thread and
b
fabric being used. Refer to “Embroidery Step by Remove the embroidery unit.
Step” of “Basic operations”.
■ Embroidery foot
c
Embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer and then slide it toward you to remove it.
■ Fabric a Needle plate cover

Be sure to embroider trial patterns on a piece of
d
scrap fabric, which includes the same threads and
fabric as what is being used in your project.
Note
• The results may be affected by the type of
fabric used. Before embroidering your
project, be sure to embroider trial patterns
on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same
as the fabric used in the project.
a Bobbin case
e
Use the cleaning brush included with the
Upper Threading machine or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and its
a
Install a needle appropriate for the upper surrounding area.
thread and fabric to be used.
For details on installing the needle, refer to
“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of “Basic operations”.
b
Attach the embroidery foot.
c
Thread the machine with the upper thread.
For details on threading the machine, refer to
“Upper Threading” of “Basic operations”.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
E-88
f h
Wipe the bobbin case (gray) with a soft lint Install the needle plate cover.
free cloth to clean it. For details on installing the needle plate cover,
g
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
refer to “Cleaning the Race” of “Appendix”. E
3
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.

a
a Needle plate cover

b
i
Install the embroidery unit.
a b
j
Insert the thread tail from the spool of
thread through the hole in the bobbin from
the inside to the outside. Hold the thread
tail while winding the thread around the
bobbin by hand. After winding the bobbin
so it is filled as shown below (about 80%),
* Align the S and ● marks. cut the thread.

k
Install a bobbin wound with an adequate
b ● mark on the machine amount of thread for pattern.
c Bobbin case
Note
Note
• For an estimated length of bobbin thread
• The bobbin case (gray) cannot be used in
required for each pattern, refer to the
any way other than bobbin work. After
“Quick Reference Guide” included with the
creating bobbin work, refer back to the
machine. Be sure to use a bobbin wound
steps in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on
with enough thread. If the bobbin runs out
page E-88 for removing and cleaning the
of thread while sewing, the embroidery
bobbin case (gray), and then reinstall the
cannot be completed.
standard bobbin case.
• Depending on the thread thickness, it may
not be possible to wind the bobbin with the
necessary length of thread. In this case, try
CAUTION winding the bobbin again, or use a lighter

weight thread.
• Be sure to use the bobbin case (gray) when
creating bobbin work. Using any other bobbin
case may result in the thread becoming
tangled or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed. If the bobbin case is incorrectly
installed, the thread may become tangled or
Embroidering E-89
Memo
CAUTION • If inserting thread tail through bobbin hole is
difficult, bobbin can be wound by holding
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or the tail and wrapping thread around inside
base. Then carefully trim thread tail so it
does not extend from the side of the
bobbin.
m
Install the bobbin wound with thread.
Whether or not tension should be applied to the
bobbin thread depends on the type of thread being
• The included bobbin was designed specifically used.
models are used, the machine will not operate ■ When tension is applied to the
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or bobbin thread
X52800-150). Insert bobbin into bobbin case so the thread
unwinds from the left side.
Then correctly pass the thread through the tension
spring as shown below.
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
Note
• Slowly and evenly wind the thread around
the bobbin.
• For best results, wind the bobbin so the
thread is snug and not twisted.
a Tension spring
l
Using scissors carefully trim the thread tail
as close to the bobbin as possible.
CAUTION
• When winding the bobbin, make sure the
thread is not frayed. Embroidering with frayed
thread may result in the thread catching on
the tension spring of the bobbin case, the
thread completely becoming tangled or
damage to the machine.
• Do not guide the bobbin thread completely
a Beginning of wound thread through the groove in the needle plate cover,
otherwise the lower threading cannot be done
correctly. Thread only as far as shown below.
CAUTION
• If thread extends beyond the top of the bobbin
too much, the thread may become tangled or
the needle may break.
E-90
■ When tension is not applied to the p

Gently pull the upper thread to bring the
bobbin thread bobbin thread up through the needle plate.
If the bobbin thread in the trial stitching is too tight E
3
and adjusting the bobbin case tension does not help,
do not pass the thread through the tension spring.
Hold the bobbin with your left hand so the thread

unwinds from the right side and hold the end of the

thread with your right hand.

hole in the needle plate.
q
Insert tweezers through bobbin thread loop
and pull bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
r
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pull out about 10 cm (approx.
4 inches) of the threads and pass them
under the embroidery foot toward the rear
of the machine.
n
Pull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of
bobbin thread.
o
Lightly hold the end of the upper thread
while turning the handwheel toward you
s
(counterclockwise) until the mark on the Install the bobbin cover with tabs.
handwheel aligns with the center top of
machine.
a Bobbin cover
→ This completes the upper and lower threading.
CAUTION
• When creating bobbin work, use the bobbin
cover with tabs, otherwise the thread may
become tangled or the needle may break.
Embroidering E-91

→ When a bobbin work embroidery pattern is selected
Selecting the Pattern the embroidery sewing speed can only be adjusted
from 100 spm to a maximum of 350 spm.
Note
Note • The beginning and end of stitching are
• Prepare the machine for bobbin work as specified for bobbin work patterns. They
described in “PREPARING FOR BOBBIN cannot be used for normal embroidering.
WORK” on page E-87. • Recommended default setting for bobbin
work embroidery is 100 spm.
a
b
Press .
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
CAUTION
• When creating bobbin work, be sure to select an
embroidery pattern for bobbin work. If any other
c
To select a bobbin work embroidery type of pattern is selected, the machine may be
damaged.
pattern, press or (Embroidery).
Note
Note
• Bobbin work embroidery sewing speed
• Embroidery patterns for bobbin work “B” defaults to 100 spm when a bobbin work
cannot be used in the “Embroidery Edit” embroidery pattern is selected. The
Settings screen will only allow speed to be
screen ( or ).
adjusted from 100 spm to a maximum
sewing speed of 350 spm.
d
Press , then select one of the bobbin
work embroidery patterns. Memo
• When an embroidery pattern for bobbin
Embroidery patterns for bobbin work appear with work is selected, the automatic thread
the letter “B” in the lower-left corner of the key. cutting function “END COLOR TRIM” is
turned off. Afterward, if a pattern other than
one for bobbin work is selected, the
automatic thread cutting function “END
COLOR TRIM” is returned to the setting that
was selected before the embroidery pattern
for bobbin work was chosen.
a “B” mark
→ Regardless of the setting that had been selected, the
automatic thread cutting function “END COLOR
TRIM” is turned off.
E-92
e f
Press . Press , and then adjust the tension of
→ The embroidery screen is displayed. the upper thread.
For details on adjusting the tension of the upper
thread, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on
E
page E-30.
3

Memo
• We recommend a setting between 6 and 8
for the upper thread tension.
Start Embroidering
a
Hoop the fabric so the right side of the
Note fabric is facing down with the stabilizer
• Since bobbin work is embroidered from the lying on the top. Use an embroidery frame
wrong side of the fabric, the pattern shown that fits the size of the pattern and then
in the screen appears as a mirror image of attach the frame to the machine. These
the final sewn embroidery. If necessary, flip patterns are embroidered from the wrong
the image to preview it. In addition, when side of the fabric so technically you are
embroidering with the thread colors shown
in the embroidery screen, select a bobbin working in “reverse” of normal
thread that matches what is shown in the embroidering.
screen.
a Image shown in screen b Sewn embroidery

(Right side of fabric)
Memo
• With bobbin work embroidery patterns, the
size and thread density cannot be changed.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery.
In addition, the automatic thread cutting Otherwise, the needle may break and cause injuries.
function “END COLOR TRIM” cannot be Not using a stabilizer material may result in a poor
turned on. finish to your project.
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
Embroidering E-93
d j
Using the presser foot lever, raise the While holding both the upper thread and
embroidery foot. the bobbin thread, sew a section of the
pattern.
e
To bring the bobbin thread above the
fabric, rotate the handwheel
counterclockwise while holding the upper
thread.
k
Stop the machine, and then tie the upper
thread and the bobbin thread together to
secure the threads.
f
As shown below, pull the upper thread to
pull the bobbin thread up through the
fabric.
l
Start embroidery again to finish the pattern.
m
a Upper thread Raise the needle and embroidery foot,
b Bobbin thread remove the embroidery frame, and then cut
the upper thread and the bobbin thread.
Memo When cutting the threads, be sure to leave an
• If the bobbin thread cannot be pulled up, adequate length of thread so they can be
use an awl to create small hole to help pull properly secured.
bobbin thread to surface.
g
buttons.
h
Lower the embroidery foot.
i
It is necessary to move to the beginning of
stitching so press , and then press .
→ The embroidery frame moves to the beginning of

stitching.
E-94
n
Using a hand sewing needle such as a
ribbon embroidering needle, pull the
bobbin thread to the top (wrong side) of the
fabric, and then tie the upper thread and
E
the bobbin thread together.
3

Memo
• If there is a gap between the start point and
end point of the pattern, leave an adequate
length of thread, cut the threads, and
remove the fabric from the machine. Use a
ribbon embroidering needle to hand sew
stitches to connect the starting and ending
points.
o
Remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame, and check the finished embroidery.
a Right side of fabric b Wrong side of fabric
p
If the desired results could not be achieved,
adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
the upper thread, and then try
embroidering the pattern again.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE THREAD
TENSION” on page E-96.
Memo
• Check bobbin after each bobbin work
pattern is embroidered to make sure there
is adequate bobbin thread for the next
pattern.
• While selecting the bobbin work pattern, the
embroidery speed value is set to “100
spm”. Refer to “Adjusting the Embroidery
Speed” on page E-33 to change the
embroidery speed.
Embroidering E-95

After embroidering trial patterns and checking the results, adjust the thread tensions if necessary. After adjusting the
tensions, be sure to embroider trial patterns again in order to check the results.
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension
Note
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the upper
• Turning the screw on the bobbin case (gray)
thread tension when creating bobbin work.
may push up the spring plate, as shown
Refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on page E-30. below.
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin If this occurs, gently press down the spring
plate with a screwdriver so it is lower than
thread the top surface of the bobbin case (gray),
If the desired stitching cannot be achieved after and then insert the bobbin case into the
adjusting the upper thread tension, adjust the tension of machine.
the bobbin thread. The tension of the bobbin thread can
be adjusted by turning the slotted-head (–) screw on the
bobbin case (gray) for bobbin work.
a Do not turn the phillips screw (+).

b Adjust with a small screwdriver. a Spring plate
To increase the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the

slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° clockwise.
CAUTION
screw on the bobbin case (gray) as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it useless.
• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
To decrease the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the providing force in either (rotational) direction may
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° counterclockwise. cause damage to the bobbin case. Should damage
occur, the bobbin case may not maintain proper
tension.
Note
• If the bobbin thread tension is tight, the
thread cannot be passed through the
tension spring when the bobbin is installed
in the bobbin case. (Refer to “When tension
is not applied to the bobbin thread” on
page E-91.)
E-96
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Several solutions for minor problems are described below. If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized
E
Baby Lock retailer.
■ The thread was accidentally cut ■ Correcting bobbin work tension 3
automatically and the bobbin thread * If the top thread shows on the bobbin side of the

fabric, increase the upper tension (Refer to
is caught inside the machine “ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION” on
page E-96).
a
Remove the embroidery frame. * If the top thread still shows on the bobbin side of the
fabric, reduce the tension of the bobbin thread or
bypass the bobbin tension. (Refer to “ADJUSTING
b
Cut the thread near the fabric above the THE THREAD TENSION” on page E-96.)
needle plate, and then remove the fabric. * Some bobbin threads are too coarse to pass through
to wrong side of fabric. In this case, be sure to color
c
Remove the bobbin, and then hold it out match top thread with bobbin threads.
toward the left side of the machine.
Example: Embroidery patterns for bobbin work
a Correct tension
b The upper thread tension is too loose, or the
d
Lower the embroidery foot. bobbin thread tension is too tight.
■ The bobbin thread catches on the

e
Apply slight tension on bobbin thread by
holding thread out to the left side of tension spring of the bobbin case
embroidery foot. Press the “Thread Cutter” Embroider with no tension applied to the bobbin
button again. thread. (Refer to “When tension is not applied to the
bobbin thread” on page E-91.)
CAUTION
• Do not pull on the thread with excessive force,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
Embroidering E-97
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-98
Appendix
This section provides important information for operating this machine. Please read this section to find
troubleshooting tips and pointers as well as how to keep your machine in the best working order.
Page number starts with “A” in this section.
The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the country or region.
Chapter1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ......................... A-2

A Appendix
Chapter 1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CARE AND MAINTENANCE ...................................... 3

Restrictions on oiling ..................................................................3
Precautions on storing the machine ............................................3
Cleaning the LCD Screen ...........................................................3
Cleaning the Machine Casing .....................................................3
Cleaning the Race .......................................................................3
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area..............................5
About the Maintenance Message ................................................5
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN ......................................... 6
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display ...........................6
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning....................................................6
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 7
Frequent troubleshooting topics .................................................7
Upper thread is too tight ............................................................7
■ Symptom .................................................................................... 7
■ Cause ......................................................................................... 7
■ Remedy ...................................................................................... 7
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric ......................................8
■ Symptom .................................................................................... 8
■ Cause ......................................................................................... 8
■ Remedy ...................................................................................... 8
Incorrect thread tension ...........................................................10
■ Symptoms ................................................................................ 10
■ Cause/remedy .......................................................................... 10
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed ..........11
■ Removing the fabric from the machine .................................... 11
■ Checking machine operations .................................................. 13
List of Symptoms.......................................................................14
ERROR MESSAGES................................................... 18
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................... 21
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE........ 22

Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ......................................22
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ........................................23
INDEX...................................................................... 24

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

A
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning it. Otherwise, electric shock or injury may result.
1

Restrictions on oiling Cleaning the Machine Casing
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a
not be oiled by the user. This machine was cloth in a neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly,
manufactured with the necessary amount of oil and wipe the surface. Then wipe again with a dry
applied to ensure correct operation, making cloth.
periodic oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the Cleaning the Race
handwheel or an unusual noise, immediately stop
using the machine, and contact your nearest If dust or bits of dirt collect in the race or bobbin
authorized retailer. case, the machine will not run well, and the
bobbin thread detection function may not operate.
Precautions on storing the Keep the machine clean for best results.
machine a
the needle.
Do not store the machine in any of the locations
b
described below, otherwise damage to the Turn the main power to OFF.
machine may result, for example, rust caused by
condensation.
c
Remove the needle, presser foot, and
* Exposed to extremely high temperatures
* Exposed to extremely low temperatures presser foot holder (see page B-55 through
* Exposed to extreme temperature changes B-57).
* Exposed to high humidity or steam
d
* Near a flame, heater or air conditioner Remove the flat bed attachment or the
* Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight embroidery unit if either is attached.
* Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments
e
Note and then slide it toward you.
• In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this
machine for an extended period of time
without using it may reduce its efficiency.
Cleaning the LCD Screen

If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with a soft, dry
cloth. Do not use organic solvents or detergents.
→ The needle plate cover is removed.
f
Note Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
• Do not wipe the LCD screen with a damp
cloth.
Memo
• Occasionally, condensation may form on
the LCD screen or it may become fogged
up; however, this is not a malfunction. After
a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
a Bobbin case
Appendix A-3
g
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner * Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
to remove any lint and dust from the race before installing the bobbin case.
and bobbin thread sensor and the
surrounding area.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized retailer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
a Cleaning brush
i
b Race Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
c Bobbin thread sensor into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
Note
• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread
sensor, the sensor may not operate
correctly.
h
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
Note
a • If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
installing the bobbin case.
a b
* Align the S and ● marks.

c Bobbin case
A-4
d
Use the screwdriver included with the
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin machine to screw and attach the needle
plate.
Case Area A
The cutter below the needle plate should be
cleaned. If dust or lint accumulate on the cutter, it
will be difficult to cut the thread when the “Thread
1
Cutter” button is pressed or the automatic thread

cutting function is used. Clean the cutter when the
thread is not easily cut.
a
Follow steps a through e in “Cleaning the
Race” to remove the needle plate cover.
b e
Use the screwdriver included with the Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
machine to unscrew and remove the needle into the needle plate, and then slide the
plate. cover back on.
About the Maintenance Message
c
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any lint and dust from the cutter
in the bobbin case area. Once this message appears, it is recommended to
take your machine to your nearest authorized
retailer for a regular maintenance check. Although
this message will disappear and the machine will
continue to function once you press , the
message will display several more times until the
appropriate maintenance is performed.
Please take the time to arrange the maintenance
your machine requires once this message appears.
Such steps will help to ensure you receive
continued, uninterrupted hours of machine
a Cutter operation for the future.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries
may result.
Appendix A-5
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel is Malfunctioning

Screen Display
If the screen does not respond correctly when you
touch a key (the machine does not perform the
Under certain lighting conditions, the brightness of operation or performs a different operation), follow
the LCD screen may need to be adjusted. the steps below to make the proper adjustments.
a
Press .
a
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the
→ The settings screen appears. main power switch to OFF and back to ON.
b
Press .
c
Display page 6 of the General settings
screen.
d
Press or to adjust the brightness of
the screen display. → The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.
b
Using the included touch pen, lightly touch
the center of each +, in order from 1 to 5.
Note
• Only use the included touch pen to touch
the screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil,
pin, or other sharp object. Do not press too
hard on the screen. Otherwise, damage
may result.
+1 +4
+5
+2 +3
* The screen appears dim as the number on the

settings screen decreases. The screen appears
c
brighter as the number increases. Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it
back to ON.
Note
• If you finish the screen adjustment and the
screen still does not respond, or if you
cannot do the adjustment, contact your
authorized retailer.
A-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
A
If the machine stops operating correctly, check the following possible problems before requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. Visit us at “ www.babylock.com ”.
If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized retailer. 1
Frequent troubleshooting topics

Detailed causes and remedies for common troubleshooting topics are described below. Be sure to refer to
this before contacting your retailer.
■ Upper thread is too tight page A-7
■ Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric page A-8
■ Incorrect thread tension page A-10
■ Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be page A-11

removed
■ Remedy
Upper thread is too tight Correctly install the lower thread.
■ Symptom a
Turn off the sewing machine.
* The upper thread appears as a single continuous
b
line.
Remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.
* The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the
c
fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.) Place the bobbin in the bobbin case so that
* The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out the thread unwinds in the correct direction.
when pulled.
* The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles * Hold the bobbin with your right hand with the
appear in the fabric. thread unwinding to the left, and hold the end of the
* The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do thread with your left hand. Then, with your right
not change even after the thread tension is adjusted. hand, place the bobbin in the bobbin case.
a Lower side of fabric

b Lower thread visible from upper side of fabric
c Upper thread If the bobbin is inserted with the thread unwinding
d Upper side of fabric in the wrong direction, sewing will be done with
e Lower thread an incorrect thread tension.
■ Cause
Incorrect lower threading
If the lower thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of
the appropriate tension being applied to the lower
thread, it is pulled through the fabric when the
upper thread is pulled up. For this reason, the thread
is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
Appendix A-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
d
While holding the bobbin in place with
your finger, pass the thread through the slit Tangled thread on wrong side of
in the needle plate.
fabric
* Hold down the bobbin with your right hand, and
then pull the end of the thread around the tab with
your left hand. ■ Symptom
* The thread becomes tangled on the lower side of the
fabric.
a Tab
b Hold down the bobbin with your right hand.
* After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and
Pull the thread to pass it through the slit in the sewing cannot continue.
* Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in
needle plate, then cut it with the cutter.
the bobbin case.
■ Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper
thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly
pulled up and the upper thread becomes tangled in
the bobbin case, causing a rattling noise.
■ Remedy
c Slit Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the
d Cutter upper threading.
a
Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot be
Sewing with the correct thread tension is possible removed, cut the thread with scissors.
after the bobbin has been correctly installed in the
bobbin case. * Refer to “Cleaning the Race” in “CARE AND
MAINTENANCE” on page A-3.
b
Remove the upper thread from the
machine.
c
Refer to the following steps to correct the
upper threading.
* If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “LOWER THREADING” on page B-40 and
“Remedy” in the section “Upper thread is too tight”
on page A-7 to correctly install the bobbin.
A-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
d g
Raise the presser foot using the presser foot While holding the thread in your right
lever. hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
A
1

* If the presser foot is not raised, the sewing machine
cannot be threaded correctly.
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down
e
Raise the needle by turning the handwheel through the groove, as shown in the
toward you (counterclockwise) so that the illustration.
mark on the wheel points up, or press
“Needle Position” button once or twice to
raise the needle.
or
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if
the thread catches on the take-up lever
visible inside the upper groove area.
a Mark
f
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Look in the upper groove area
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
j
Thread the needle according to steps j
and o in “Upper Threading” on page B-48.
Appendix A-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Incorrect thread tension

■ Symptoms
• Symptom 1: The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
• Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight line on the upper side of the fabric.
• Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the lower side of the fabric.
• Symptom 4: The lower thread appears as a straight line on the lower side of the fabric.
• Symptom 5: The stitching on the lower side of the fabric is loose or has slack.
□ Symptom 1 □ Symptom 3
a Lower side of fabric
b Lower thread visible on
upper side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Upper side of fabric
e Lower thread
f Upper thread visible from
lower side of fabric
■ Cause/remedy
□ Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The lower threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Upper Thread is Too Tight” on page S-12.
<With symptoms 3 through 5 described above>

The upper threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric” on page A-8 to correct
the upper threading.
□ Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used.
The sewing machine needle that should be used depends on the type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted
correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped stitches.
* Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on page B-60 to check that a needle and thread are appropriate for the
fabric being used.
□ Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
Adjust the upper thread tension to select an appropriate thread tension.
The appropriate thread tension differs according to the type of fabric and thread being used.
* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in your project.
Note
• If the upper threading and lower threading are incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted
correctly, even by adjusting the upper thread tension. Check the upper threading and lower threading
first, and then adjust the thread tension.
* When the lower thread is visible on the upper side

of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a lower
number. (Loosen the thread tension.)
* When the upper thread is visible on the lower side
of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a higher
number. (Tighten the thread tension.)
A-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
h
Fabric is caught in the machine
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
and cannot be removed A
If the fabric is caught in the sewing machine and
cannot be removed, the thread may have become
tangled under the needle plate. Follow the
1
procedure described below to remove the fabric

from the machine. If the operation could not be
completed according to the procedure, instead of a Bobbin case
attempting to complete it forcefully, contact your
i
nearest authorized retailer. Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
■ Removing the fabric from the to remove any dust or loose threads from
the race and its surrounding area.
machine
a
Immediately stop the sewing machine.
b
Turn off the sewing machine.
c
Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the

handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the a Cleaning brush
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle. b Race
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57.
Continue with
d
Remove the presser foot and presser foot If the fabric could be removed
step p.
holder.
If the fabric could not be Continue with
* Refer to “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on removed step j.
page B-55.
j
Use the enclosed disc-shaped screwdriver
e
Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below to loosen the two screws on the needle
it. plate.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with
the following steps to clean the race.
f
Remove the needle plate cover.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
g
Cut out the tangled threads, and then
remove the bobbin.
Appendix A-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
k p
Slightly lift up the needle plate, cut any Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
tangled threads, and then remove the on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
needle plate. on the machine.
Remove the fabric and threads from the needle plate.
If the fabric cannot be removed, even after completing b

these steps, contact your nearest authorized retailer.
l
Remove any threads in the race and around a b
the feed dogs.
m
Turn the handwheel to raise the feed dogs.
n
Align the two screw holes in the needle
plate with the two holes at the needle plate
* Align the S and ● marks.
mounting base, and then fit the needle plate
onto the machine.
o
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right
side of the needle plate. Then, use the
disc-shaped screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw on the left side. Finally, firmly
tighten the screw on the right side.
c Bobbin case
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
Turn the handwheel to check that the feed dogs move otherwise, the upper thread may become
smoothly and do not contact the edges of the slots in tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
the needle plate. performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized retailer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
a Correct position of feed dogs

b Incorrect position of feed dogs
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
A-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
q c
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
into the needle plate, and then slide the (counterclockwise), and look from all sides
cover back on. to check that the needle falls at the center
of the hole in the needle plate.
A
If the needle contacts the needle plate, remove the
needle plate, and then install it again, starting with
step m in “Removing the fabric from the machine” on
1
page A-12.

Note
• If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
a Hole in the needle plate
installing the bobbin case.
b Handwheel
r
Check the condition of the needle, and then
d
install it. Select zigzag stitch . At this time,
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle. increase the stitch length and width to their
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57. maximum settings.
e
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
CAUTION (counterclockwise) and check that the
needle bar and feed dogs operate correctly.
• Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries. If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the
machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact
your nearest authorized retailer.
Note
f
• After completing this procedure, continue Turn off the machine, and then install the
with the following procedure in “Checking bobbin and presser foot.
machine operations” to check that the * Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” and “CHANGING THE
machine is operating correctly. PRESSER FOOT” on page B-55.
g
Memo Correctly thread the machine.
• Since the needle may have been damaged
* For details on the machine, refer to “Upper
when the fabric was caught in the machine,
Threading” on page B-48.
we recommend replacing it with a new one.
Note
■ Checking machine operations • The thread may have become tangled as a
If the needle plate has been removed, check result of incorrect upper threading. Make
machine operations to confirm that installation has sure that the machine is correctly threaded.
been completed correctly.
h
Perform trial sewing with normal fabric.
a
Note
b
Select . • Incorrect sewing may be the result of
incorrect upper threading or sewing thin
fabrics. If there are poor results from the
trial sewing, check the upper threading or
Note the type of fabric being used.
• Do not yet install the presser foot and
thread.
Appendix A-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
List of Symptoms
Problem Cause Solution Page

The thread is tangled Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine B-48
on the wrong side of and rethread the machine.
the fabric. Using improper needle or thread for the Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle B-60
selected fabric. Combinations” chart.
The upper thread is The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. Correctly install the bobbin thread. B-45
too tight.
Cannot thread the Needle is not in the correct position. Press the “Needle Position” button to raise B-14
needle the needle.
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-57
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57
Cannot lower the Presser foot was raised using the “Presser Foot Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to B-14
presser foot with the Lifter” button. lower the presser foot.
presser foot lever
Thread tension is Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine B-48
incorrect and rethread the machine.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin. (If needle plate was B-45
removed, reinstall needle plate and tighten
screws prior to installing bobbin case.)
Using improper needle or thread for the Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle B-60
selected fabric. Combination” chart.
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. Reattach the presser foot holder correctly. B-55
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. S-12, E-30
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. B-40
Upper thread breaks Machine is not threaded correctly (used the Rethread the machine correctly. B-48
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread
did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.)
There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your A-3
Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension. S-12, E-30
Using improper needle or thread for the Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle B-60
selected fabric. Combinations” chart.
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread —
and remove it from the race, etc.
There are scratches near the hole of the needle Replace the needle plate, or consult your S-26
plate. authorized retailer.
There are scratches near the hole in the presser Replace the presser foot, or consult your B-55
foot. authorized retailer.
Thread is knotted or tangled. Rethread upper and lower thread. B-45, B-48
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only B-45
is not used. use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
Bobbin thread breaks Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. B-45
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t Replace the bobbin. B-45
rotate properly.
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc. to cut the twisted thread —
and remove it from the race, etc.
machine.
Bobbin thread does The thread is not passed through the bobbin Correctly pass the thread through the bobbin B-41
not wind neatly on the winding thread guide correctly. winding thread guide.
bobbin. Bobbin spins slowly. Press [+] in the bobbin winding window to B-43
increase the bobbin winding speed.
The thread that was pulled out was not wound Wind the thread that was pulled off around B-42
onto the bobbin correctly. the bobbin 5 or 6 times clockwise.
A-14
TROUBLESHOOTING

Skipped stitches Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combination” chart.
B-60
A
1
Machine is threaded incorrectly. Check the steps for threading the machine B-48
and rethread it correctly.
Dust or lint has collected under the needle Remove the dust or lint with the brush. A-3
plate.

Needle is defective. Replace the needle. B-57
Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn. Sew with one sheet of thin paper under the S-9
fabric.
Needle breaks Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-57
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. Tighten the needle clamp screw. B-58
Needle is turned or bent. Replace the needle. B-57
Using improper needle or thread for the Check the needle and fabric combination. B-59, E-21
selected fabric.
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the recommended presser foot. S-68
Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension setting. S-12, E-30
Fabric is pulled during sewing. Do not pull the fabric during sewing. —
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool B-48
cap, then reattach the spool cap.
There are scratches around the holes in the Replace the needle plate, or consult your A-3
needle plate. authorized retailer.
There are scratches around the hole(s) in the Replace the presser foot, or consult your B-55
presser foot. authorized retailer.
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. B-57
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine B-48
and rethread the machine.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. B-45
Presser foot is attached incorrectly. Attach the presser foot correctly. B-55
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. Securely tighten the screw of the presser B-55
foot.
Fabric is too thick. Use fabric that the needle can pierce when S-7
the handwheel is turned.
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric Allow the fabric to be fed without being
or thick seams. forcefully pushed.
Stitch length is too short. Adjust the stitch length. S-10
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being Attach stabilizer. S-81, E-11
embroidered.
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. B-40
Fabric does not feed Feed dogs are set in the down position. S-40
through the machine Press , and then turn the handwheel to
raise the feed dogs.
Stitches are too close together. Lengthen the stitch length setting. S-10
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the correct presser foot. S-68
Thread is entangled. Cut the entangled thread and remove it from A-11
the race.
Fabric puckers There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin Check the steps for threading the machine B-45, B-48
threading. and rethread it correctly.
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. Shorten the stitch length. S-10
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool B-48
cap, then reattach the spool cap.
Wrong presser foot. Use the correct presser foot. S-68
Appendix A-15
TROUBLESHOOTING

High-pitched sound Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. Remove the dust or lint. A-3
while sewing Pieces of thread are caught in the race. Clean the race. A-3
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine B-48
and rethread the machine.
machine.
Character pattern Wrong presser foot was used. Attach the correct presser foot. S-68
does not turn out Pattern adjustment settings were set Revise the pattern adjustment settings. S-82
incorrectly.
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics Attach a stabilizer material. S-81
or stretch fabrics.
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands S-3
while it was being sewn. so that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
Machine does not There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. S-21, S-77, E-3,
operate E-58
“Start/Stop” button was not pushed. Press the “Start/Stop” button. B-14
Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. B-21
Presser foot is not lowered. Lower the presser foot. B-14
“Start/Stop” button was pushed with the foot Remove the foot controller, or use the foot S-4
controller attached. controller to operate the machine.
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the Use the foot controller instead of the B-28, S-4
machine is set for the sewing speed controller “Start/Stop” button to operate the machine,
to control the zigzag stitch width. or set the “Width Control” to “OFF” in the
settings screen.
All keys and buttons have been locked by B-55, B-57
. buttons.
Nothing happens, The screen has been locked. Press either of the following keys to unlock —
even if the LCD
display is pressed the screen.
The fabric feeds in the The feed mechanism is damaged. Contact your nearest authorized retailer. —
opposite direction.
The LCD screen is Condensation has formed on the LCD screen. After a while, the cloudiness will disappear. —
fogged up.
Embroidery pattern Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread A-11
does not sew out and remove it from the race, etc.
correctly Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly If the fabric is not stretched tight in the frame, E-14
(fabric was loose, etc.). the pattern may turn out poorly or there may
be shrinkage of the pattern. Set the fabric
into the frame correctly.
Stabilizing material was not attached. Always use stabilizing material, especially E-11
with stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics,
fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics that
often cause pattern shrinkage. See your
authorized retailer for the proper stabilizer.
There was an object placed near the machine, If the frame bumps something during sewing, E-21
and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the the pattern will turn out poorly. Do not place
object during sewing. anything in the area where the frame may
bump it during sewing.
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so E-14
the sewing arm, so the embroidery unit cannot that the excess fabric is away from the
move. sewing arm, and rotate the pattern 180
degrees.
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit Place a large thick book or similar object —
cannot move freely. under the arm head to lightly lift the heavy
side and keep it level.
A-16
TROUBLESHOOTING

Embroidery pattern Fabric is hanging off the table. If the fabric is hanging off the table during E-21
does not sew out
correctly
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not
move freely. Place the fabric so that it does A
1
not hang off the table or hold the fabric to
keep it from dragging.
Fabric is snagged or caught on something. Stop the machine and place the fabric so that —
it does not get caught or snagged.
Embroidery frame was removed during sewing If the presser foot is bumped or the E-26

(for example, to reset the bobbin). The presser embroidery unit is moved during sewing, the
foot was bumped or moved while removing or pattern will not turn out. Be careful when
attaching the embroidery frame, or the removing or reattaching the embroidery
embroidery unit was moved. frame during sewing.
Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it Attach the stabilizer correctly. E-11
is smaller than the embroidery frame.
Loops appear on the The thread tension is incorrectly set. Adjust the thread tension. E-30 to E-32
surface of the fabric The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly Use the embroidery needle plate cover. E-22
when embroidering set for the combination of the fabric, thread and
pattern being used.
The combination of the bobbin case and Change the bobbin case or bobbin thread so E-21
bobbin thread is incorrect. that the correct combination is used.
Embroidery unit does There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. E-3, E-58
not operate Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. B-21
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. Reattach the embroidery unit correctly. B-65
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit Perform the initialization process correctly. B-65
was initialized.
Pointer of embroidery With thick elastic fabric, the position will be Manually adjust the position according to the B-64
foot “W+” with LED misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric. thickness of the fabric.
pointer does not With fabric having a very uneven surface, the The pointer indication should be used only as B-63
indicate the position position is not correctly aligned. a reference.
correctly
Specifying with The sensor pen has not been calibrated. Before using the sensor pen for the first time, B-76
sensor pen cannot be be sure to calibrate it.
done accurately The pen is being held differently than when it When using the sensor pen, be sure to hold it B-76
was calibrated. at the same angle as when it was calibrated.
The specification location may be misaligned
if the pen is held at a slightly different angle.
In this case, make fine adjustments after
making the selection.
CAUTION
• This machine is equipped with a thread detection device. If the “Start/Stop” button is pushed before the
upper threading is done, the machine will not operate properly. Also, depending on the pattern selected,
the machine may feed the fabric even if the needle is raised. This is due to the needle bar release
mechanism. At these times, the machine will make a sound different from what is made during normal
sewing. This is not the sign of a malfunction.
• If the power is disconnected during sewing:
Turn the main power to OFF and unplug the machine.
If you restart the machine, follow the instructions for operating the machine correctly.
Appendix A-17
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGES
If the machine is not properly set and the “Start/Stop” button or the “Reverse Stitch” button is pressed, or
if the operation procedure is incorrect, the machine does not start. An alarm sounds and an error message
is displayed on the LCD. If an error message displays, follow the instructions in the message.
Below is an explanation of error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you press or do the
operation correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).
CAUTION
• Be sure to rethread the machine. If you press the “Start/Stop” button without rethreading the machine,
the thread tension may be wrong or the needle may break and cause injury.
Marks Error Messages Cause/Solution

A malfunction occurred.Turn the machine off, then on again. This message is displayed if some malfunction occurs.
An invalid area was touched by the sensor pen. Touch again This message appears when you touch the invalid area of
within the active sensor area. (130mm x 200mm / 5"X 8") sensor pen. Touch the active area. (see page B-78)
An invalid sewing area was touched by the sensor pen. Touch This message appears when you touch the invalid area of
again within the valid sewing area. sewing with the sensor pen. Touch the active area. (see page
B-78)
Attach the embroidery frame. This message appears if the embroidery frame is not attached
when you press in the embroidery screen. (see page

B-85)
Can not change the configuration of the characters This message is displayed when there are too many characters
and the curved character configuration is impossible.
Check and rethread the upper thread. This message is displayed when the upper thread is broken or
not threaded correctly, and the “Start/Stop” button or the
“Reverse Stitch” button is pressed.
Data volume is too large for this pattern. This message is displayed when the patterns you are editing
take up too much memory, or if you are editing too many
patterns for the memory.
Failed to save file. This message appears when you try to save more than 100
settings screen image files in the USB media. In this case,
delete a file from the USB media or use different USB media.
(see page B-35)
In twin needle mode, the automatic needle threading button This message is displayed when the automatic needle
cannot be used. threading button is pushed while twin needle sewing is set.
Lower the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is up, a
buttonhole stitch is selected, and the “Start/Stop” button or
“Reverse Stitch” button is pushed.
Lower the presser foot lever. This message is displayed when the “Presser Foot Lifter”
button is pushed while the presser foot lever is raised/the
needle is lowered.
Move the sensor pen away from the currently marked position. This message appears when you press down the sensor pen
tip before pressing and keep pressing for the certain

period. Move the sensor pen away from the current position.
Not enough available memory to save the pattern. Delete This message is displayed when the memory is full and the
another pattern? stitch or pattern cannot be saved.
OK to automatically lower the presser foot? This message is displayed when is pressed (the
presser foot is raised).
OK to delete the ending point setting? This message appears when you try to recall the pattern
stored in the machine while specifying the sewing end point
using the sensor function. (see page B-83)
A-18
ERROR MESSAGES

OK to delete the selected pattern? This message is displayed when, after selecting a pattern,
or is pressed and the pattern is about to be A

1
deleted.
OK to delete the setting?
This message appears when or is pressed to
delete the settings for a utility stitch. To delete the selected

settings, press .
OK to recall and resume previous memory? This message appears if the machine is turned off while
sewing, then turned on again.
Press to return the machine to the condition (pattern

position and number of stitches) when it was turned off. Follow
the procedure described in “If the Thread Breaks During
Sewing” on page E-27 to align the needle position and sew the
remainder of the pattern.
OK to reset the pattern’s border setting, position and/or angle? This message appears when you try to use the automatic
positioning function using the sensor pen with the border
pattern. (see page B-85)
OK to revert to the original position and/or angle? This message appears when you try to use the automatic
positioning function using the sensor pen with the pattern,
rotated or replaced. (see page B-85)
Preventive maintenance is recommended. This message is displayed when the machine needs to be
maintained. (see page A-3)
Raise the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is down,
a stitch other than a buttonhole is selected, and the “Start/
Stop” button or the “Reverse Stitch” button is pushed.
Remove Dual Feed module from the machine. This message appears when you try to start embroidering with
the dual feed foot attached to the machine. Remove the dual
feed foot before entering the embroidery mode. (see page
B-69)
Remove Embroidery foot with LED pointer from the machine. This message appears when you try to start sewing
utility/decorative stitch or character pattern with the
embroidery foot with the LED pointer attached to the machine.
Remove the embroidery foot with the LED pointer before
entering the sewing mode. (see page B-62)
Retrieving the pattern. Wait a moment. This message is displayed when the machine is retrieving a
previously saved pattern while in “Embroidery Edit” mode.
Sensor module error. This message appears when something is wrong with the
sensor unit of the machine. Consult your authorized retailer.
Set the clock. This message appears when the time/date is not set. Set
time/date. (see page B-22)
The bobbin thread is almost empty. This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is running
out.
The bobbin winder safety device has activated. Is the thread This message is displayed when the bobbin is being wound,
tangled? and the motor locks because the thread is tangled, etc.
The carriage of the embroidery unit will move. Keep your This message appears before embroidery unit moves.
hands etc. away from the carriage.
The ending point cannot be selected for this stitch. This message appears when the function to specify the sewing
end point cannot be used with the current stitch. Select other
stitch. (see page B-83)
The needle position cannot be changed for this stitch. This message appears when the function to specify the needle
drop position cannot be used with the current stitch. Select
other stitch. (see page B-83)
The needle will move. Keep your hands etc. away from the This message appears when you touch the point closer than 2
needle area. cm from the needle drop point with the sensor pen in the
sensor function. (see page B-75)
The pattern extends out of the pattern area, repeat positioning This message appears when the specified pattern position
of center and angle using sensor pen. extends out of the pattern area. Specify more centered
position of the embroidery frame. (see page B-85)
Appendix A-19
ERROR MESSAGES

The pockets are full Delete a pattern. This message is displayed when the memory is full and a
pattern must be deleted.
The safety device has been activated.Is the thread tangled? Is This message is displayed when the motor locks due to
the needle bent? tangled thread or for other reasons related to thread delivery.
The shutoff support mode has been activated. Turn off the This message appears when the machine is in the shutoff
machine. support mode. Turn off the machine once to start the machine
again. (see page B-32)
The “Start/Stop” button does not operate with the foot This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is
controller attached. Remove the foot controller. pushed to sew Utility stitches or Character/Decorative stitches
while the foot controller is connected.
(This message does not appear when embroidering).
The upper thread may not be threaded correctly. Thread the This message is displayed when it seems that the upper
upper thread from the beginning. thread has not been threaded correctly.
The USB media was changed. Do not change the USB media This message is displayed when you attempt to select a
while it is being read. pattern after the USB media in which the pattern is saved has
been changed.
There is no needle plate cover. Attach a needle plate cover. This message is displayed when the needle plate cover is not
attached.
This file cannot be used. This message appears if the file format is incompatible with
this machine. Check the list of compatible file formats. (see
page S-95)
This file exceeds the data capacity and cannot be used. Use a This message is displayed when the file size exceeds the data
suitable size file. capacity of the machine.
Confirm the file size and format. (see page S-96)
This function cannot be used while in the sensor mode. This message appears when the selected function is not
available with the sensor function. (see page B-73)
This key cannot be used at this time.

This message is displayed when you press in
the screen other than the Utility Stitch, or press
in the screen other than the Utility Stitch or

Character/Decorative Stitch.
This key does not operate when the needle is down. Raise the This message is displayed when a key on the LCD display is
needle and press the key again. touched while the needle is in the down position.
This pattern cannot be sewn with this mode. This message is displayed when the selected stitch is not
available for the specific function.
This stitch is not “Dual Feed Mode” compatible. This message appears when the dual feed foot cannot be used
with the current stitch. Select other stitch. (see page B-68)
This USB media cannot be used. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible
media.
This USB media is incompatible. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible
USB media. For a list of compatible USB media, visit
“ www.babylock.com ”.
Transmitting by USB This message is displayed while the USB media is
transmitting.
Turn off the power and replace the needle plate. This message is displayed when you try to sew with a stitch
other than a middle needle position stitch while the single-hole
needle plate is installed.
This message is displayed when the needle plate is removed
with the machine on or when the machine is turned on and
“Embroidery” or “Embroidery Edit” mode is selected (see page
B-24).
USB media error This message is displayed when an error occurs with the USB
media.
USB media is not loaded. Load USB media. This message is displayed when you try to recall or save a
pattern while no USB media is loaded.
Use the presser foot lifter button to lower the presser foot. This message is displayed when a button, such as the
“Start/Stop” button, is pushed while the presser foot is raised.
A-20
SPECIFICATIONS

When the speed controller is set to control the zigzag stitch This message is displayed when the speed control lever is set
width, the “Start/Stop” button does not operate. to control the zigzag stitch width, and the “Start/Stop” button
is pushed. Use the foot controller to operate the machine.
A
SPECIFICATIONS 1

Item Specification
Sewing Machine and Accessories Dimensions of machine Approx. 57.1 cm (W) × 33.5 cm (H) × 28.4 cm (D) (approx.
(Box 1 of 2) 22-1/2 inches (W) × 13-1/16 inches (H) × 11-3/16 inches (D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 55.0 cm (H) × 37.7 cm (D) (approx.
26-15/16 inches (W) × 21-5/8 inches (H) × 14-13/16 inches
(D))
Weight of machine Approx. 15.4 kg (approx. 33.9 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 22.0 kg (approx. 48.5 lb)
Sewing speed 70 to 1050 stitches per minute
Needles Home sewing machine needles (HA × 130)
Embroidery Unit Dimensions of embroidery unit Approx. 54.5 cm (W) × 13.0 cm (H) × 46.4 cm (D) (approx.
(Box 2 of 2) 21-7/16 inches (W) × 5-1/8 inch (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))
Dimensions of machine with Approx. 81.5 cm (W) × 33.5 cm (H) × 46.4 cm (D) (approx.
embroidery unit attached 32-1/16 inches (W) × 13-1/16 inch (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 55.0 cm (H) × 18.8 cm (D) (approx.
26-15/16 inches (W) × 21-11/16 inch (H) × 7-7/16 inches (D))
Weight of embroidery unit Approx. 3.9 kg (approx. 8.5 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 6.0 kg (approx. 13.2 lb)
Total Shipping Weight (Combination of 2 boxes complete) Approx. 31.0 kg (approx. 68.3 lb)
* Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.
Appendix A-21
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

You can use USB media or a computer to upgrade software for your sewing machine.
When an upgrade program is available on “ www.babylock.com ”, please download the files following
the instructions on the website and steps below.
Note
• When using USB media to upgrade the software, check that no data other than the upgrade file is
saved on the USB media being used before starting to upgrade.
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Note

• The access lamp will begin blinking after
Media inserting USB media, and it will take about 5
to 6 seconds to recognize the media. (Time
will differ depending on the USB media).
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
d
Press .
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.
b
Press .
c
Insert the USB media into the USB port for
media/mouse on the machine. The media
→ The upgrade file is loaded.
device should only contain the upgrade file.
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
a USB port for media/mouse

b USB media
e
Remove the USB media, and turn the
machine off and on again.
A-22
Upgrade Procedure Using

Computer A
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
1
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.

b e
Press . When the message disappears, press
c
and for the machine.
→ “Removable Disk” will appear in “Computer (My
computer)”.
d
Copy the upgrade file to “Removable Disk”. → The upgrade file is loaded.
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
→ The following message will appear.
f
Unplug the USB cable, and turn the
machine off and on again.
Appendix A-23
INDEX
INDEX
A machine casing ...................................................................... A-3
race ........................................................................................ A-3
Accessories Combining Patterns
included accessories ............................................................ B-15 character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-90
options ................................................................................. B-18 embroidery edit .................................................................... E-80
Accessory compartment ........................................................... B-15 Cord guide bobbin cover .......................................................... S-32
Adapter .................................................................................... B-55 Crazy quilt ............................................................................... S-32
Adjusting the LED pointer ........................................................ B-64 Custom Thread Table ..................................................... E-68, E-72
Air vent .................................................................................... B-12 Cut/Tension key ....................................................................... E-30
Aligning the position ................................................................. E-36
Alphabet characters
character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-78
D
embroidery ............................................................................. E-5 Darning .................................................................................... S-58
embroidery edit ..................................................................... E-59 Dart seam ................................................................................. S-28
Appliqué ................................................................................... S-48 Density key .............................................................................. E-40
embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-23 Dual feed foot .......................................................................... B-68
quilting ................................................................................. S-38
using a zigzag stitch .............................................................. S-31
using an embroidery frame pattern ........................................ E-52
E
Array key ....................................................................... E-60, E-64 Eco mode ................................................................................. B-32
Arrow keys ..................................................................... E-36, E-81 Editing
Automatic fabric sensor system ................................................. S-17 character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-84
Automatic reinforcement stitch key ............................................. S-6 embroidery ........................................................................... E-36
Automatic thread cutting key .................................................... S-13 embroidery edit .................................................................... E-61
Automatic Threading button ......................................... B-14, B-48 Elastic zigzag stitches ............................................................... S-33
Elongation key .......................................................................... S-87
B Embroidery
adjusting the speed ............................................................... E-33
Back to beginning key ............................................................... S-88 automatic thread cutting function (END COLOR TRIM) ........ E-32
Ball point needle 75/11 .................................................. B-60, E-33 edges or corners ................................................................... E-16
Bar tacks ................................................................................... S-60 key functions ........................................................................ E-10
Basting ...................................................................................... S-28 restarting from the beginning ................................................ E-28
Blind hem stitches ..................................................................... S-45 resuming embroidery after turning off the power .................. E-28
Bobbin ribbons or tape ..................................................................... E-16
pulling up the bobbin thread ................................................ B-47 selecting patterns .................................................................... E-3
runs out of thread .................................................................. E-26 small fabrics ......................................................................... E-16
setting .................................................................................. B-45 thread color display .............................................................. E-34
winding ................................................................................ B-40 thread trimming function (JUMP STITCH TRIM) .................... E-32
Bobbin case Embroidery card ......................................................................... E-7
bobbin case .......................................................................... E-21 Embroidery card reader .............................................................. E-7
cleaning ................................................................................. A-3 Embroidery edit
Bobbin cover ................................................................ B-13, B-46 changing the thread color ..................................................... E-67
Bobbin holder (switch) ............................................................. B-42 combined patterns ...................................................... E-80, E-83
Bobbin winder ......................................................................... B-12 custom thread table .................................................... E-68, E-72
Bobbin work ................................................................ S-104, E-86 explanation of functions ....................................................... E-57
Border key ..................................................................... E-73, E-76 key functions ........................................................................ E-62
Button sewing ........................................................................... S-61 repeated patterns .................................................................. E-73
4 hole buttons ....................................................................... S-62 Embroidery foot ........................................................................ B-62
shank .................................................................................... S-62 Embroidery foot with LED pointer ............................................ B-62
Buttonhole lever ................................................. B-13, S-56, S-59 Embroidery frame display ......................................................... E-35
Buttonholes Embroidery frames
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate .... S-58 attaching .............................................................................. E-17
one-step ................................................................................ S-55 inserting fabric ...................................................................... E-14
removing .............................................................................. E-17
C types ..................................................................................... E-13
using the embroidery sheet ................................................... E-15
Calibrating the sensor pen ........................................................ B-76 Embroidery key ........................................................................ E-79
Character spacing key ............................................................... E-64 Embroidery needle plate cover ................................................. E-22
Character/Decorative Stitches Embroidery patterns
adjustments ........................................................................... S-82 aligning the position ............................................................. E-36
combining ............................................................................. S-90 checking the position ........................................................... E-19
editing ................................................................................... S-84 combining ............................................................................ E-80
key functions ......................................................................... S-84 duplicating ........................................................................... E-79
retrieving .................................................................. S-99, S-100 editing .................................................................................. E-61
saving ............................................................. S-96, S-97, S-98 linked characters .................................................................. E-41
selecting ................................................................................ S-77 patterns which use appliqué ................................................. E-23
sewing .................................................................................. S-81 retrieving .................................................................... E-49, E-50
Cleaning revising ................................................................................. E-36
LCD screen ............................................................................ A-3 saving .............................................................. E-46, E-47, E-48
A-24
INDEX
selecting ...................................................................... E-3, E-58 changing the needle position ................................................ S-25
sewing .................................................................................. E-21 checking the needle location ................................................. B-7
using a frame pattern to make an appliqué ................ E-52, E-53 fabric/thread/needle combinations ....................................... B-60
Embroidery sheet ...................................................................... E-15
Embroidery unit ............................................................. B-14, B-65
mode ................................................................................... B-24
twin needle .......................................................................... B-52
A
1
carriage ................................................................................ B-14 Needle bar thread guides .............................................. B-13, B-52
Error messages .......................................................................... A-18 Needle clamp screw ................................................................ B-13
Eyelet ....................................................................................... S-62 Needle mode selection key ...................................................... B-52
Needle plate ............................................................................ B-13
F Needle position ............................................................. S-18, S-25
Needle Position button ............................................................ B-14
Fabrics
fabric/thread/needle combinations ........................................ B-60 O
sewing heavyweight fabrics .................................................... S-7
sewing lightweight fabrics ....................................................... S-9 Operation buttons ......................................................... B-12, B-14
sewing stretch fabrics ................................................... S-9, S-57 Overcasting ................................................................... S-31, S-33
Fagoting ................................................................................... S-52
Feed dogs ...................................................................... B-13, S-40 P
Flat bed attachment ....................................................... B-12, B-65
Flat fell Seam ............................................................................ S-29 Patchwork ................................................................................. S-32
Foot controller ................................................................. B-12, S-4 Piecing ...................................................................................... S-36
Forward/Back key .......................................................... E-27, E-28 Pintuck ..................................................................................... S-30
Free motion sewing mode ........................................................ S-40 Pivoting .................................................................................... S-15
Power cord .............................................................................. B-22
G Power cord receptacle ............................................................. B-12
Presser foot
Gathering ................................................................................. S-29 adapter ................................................................................. B-55
Guideline marker ..................................................................... S-14 attaching .............................................................................. B-55
pressure ................................................................................ S-17
H removing .............................................................................. B-55
types ..................................................................................... S-68
Handle ..................................................................................... B-12 Presser foot code ......................................................................... E-9
Handwheel ............................................................................... B-12 Presser foot holder ........................................................ B-13, B-55
Heirloom .................................................................................. S-53 Presser foot holder screw ......................................................... B-13
Hemstitching ............................................................................ S-53 Presser foot lever .............................................................. B-12, S-8
Home page screen .................................................................... B-24 Presser Foot Lifter button .......................................................... B-14
Presser foot/Needle exchange key ........... B-52, B-55, B-57, B-62
I Pre-tension disk ................................................. B-12, B-42, B-44
Image key ............................................................ S-22, S-89, E-20 Q

K Quilting .................................................................................... S-35
free motion ........................................................................... S-40
Key functions with satin stitches .................................................................. S-39
character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-84
embroidery ........................................................................... E-10 R
embroidery edit .................................................................... E-62
utility stitches ........................................................................ B-26 Race .......................................................................................... A-3
Knee lifter ...................................................................... B-12, S-15 Reinforcement Stitch button ............................................. B-14, S-5
Repeated patterns ..................................................................... E-73
L Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns ....................................... S-99
L/R SHIFT ................................................................................. S-11 computer ................................................................. S-101, E-51
LCD screen .................................................................... B-12, B-24 embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-49
cleaning .................................................................................. A-3 machine’s memory ..................................................... S-99, E-49
locking ................................................................................. S-18 stitch settings ......................................................................... S-23
Lower threading USB media ............................................................... S-100, E-50
pulling up the bobbin thread ................................................ B-47 utility stitches ........................................................................ S-23
setting the bobbin ................................................................. B-45 Reverse Stitch button ....................................................... B-14, S-5
winding the bobbin .............................................................. B-40 Reverse/Reinforcement stitches ................................................... S-5
Rotate key ...................................................................... E-38, E-63
M
S
Machine operation mode key ..................................................... A-7
Main power switch ............................................. B-12, B-21, B-73 Satin stitches .................................................................. S-39, S-88
Mini spool insert ....................................................................... B-41 Saving
Mirror image key ................................................. S-21, S-87, E-39 character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-96
Multi color key .............................................................. E-40, E-66 computer ................................................................... S-98, E-48
Multi-directional sewing ........................................................... S-63 embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-46
machine’s memory ..................................................... S-96, E-46
N stitch settings ......................................................................... S-22
USB media ................................................................. S-97, E-47
Needle utility stitches ........................................................................ S-22
changing the needle ............................................................. B-57 Scallop stitches ......................................................................... S-50
Appendix A-25
INDEX
Screen brightness ....................................................................... A-6 using the spool net ............................................................... B-54
Sensor functions ....................................................................... B-72 USB cable ..................................... B-67, S-98, E-48, E-51, A-23
embroidering position .......................................................... B-85 USB media
guideline marker .................................................................. B-78 recalling ................................................................... S-100, E-50
L/R SHIFT ............................................................................. B-81 saving ......................................................................... S-97, E-47
needle drop position ............................................................ B-80 usable ......................................................................... S-95, E-44
sewing end point .................................................................. B-83 USB mouse ................................................................... B-32, B-68
Sensor pen ............................................................................... B-73 USB port connector
Sensor pen holder .................................................................... B-74 for computer .................................................... B-12, S-98, E-48
Settings for media .................................................................... S-97, E-47
automatic reinforcement stitching ........................................... S-5 Utility stitches
automatic thread cutting ............................................ S-13, E-32 key functions ........................................................................ B-26
display language .................................................................. B-33 pattern explanation key ........................................................ B-39
embroidery settings .............................................................. B-31 retrieving .............................................................................. S-23
general settings .................................................................... B-29 saving ................................................................................... S-22
machine setting mode key ............................... B-28, E-33, E-68 selecting ............................................................................... S-21
sewing settings ..................................................................... B-28 sewing type selection key ..................................................... B-38
stitch length .......................................................................... S-10 stitch setting chart ................................................................. S-68
stitch width ........................................................................... S-10
thread tension ............................................................ S-12, E-30 W
thread trimming .................................................................... E-32
Sewing machine help key ........................................................ B-36 Walking foot ............................................................................ B-55
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide) ........ B-12, B-14, S-3
Sewing type selection key ........................................................ B-38 Z
Shelltuck stitches ...................................................................... S-49
Shutoff support mode ............................................................... B-32 Zigzag stitches .......................................................................... S-31
Single/Repeat sewing key .......................................................... S-87 Zipper insertion
Size key ......................................................................... E-37, E-63 centered ............................................................................... S-64
Size selection key ..................................................................... S-86 side ...................................................................................... S-65
Smocking stitches ..................................................................... S-51
Speaker .................................................................................... B-29
Specifications ........................................................................... A-21
Spool cap ................................................................................. B-12
Spool net ................................................................................. B-54
Spool pin ................................................................................. B-12
Stabilizer ................................................................................... E-11
Start/Stop button ...................................................................... B-14
Starting point key ...................................................................... E-37
Step stitch patterns .................................................................... S-93
Stitch setting chart ..................................................................... S-68
Straight stitch foot ..................................................................... S-26
Straight stitch needle plate ........................................................ S-26
Straight stitches ......................................................................... S-24
Supplemental spool pin ..................................... B-12, B-40, B-52
T
Tape attaching .......................................................................... S-33
Tape or elastic attaching ........................................................... S-52
Thread
fabric/thread/needle combinations ....................................... B-60
thread tension ............................................................ S-12, E-30
Thread color display ................................................................. E-34
Thread cutter ................................................................... B-12, S-4
Thread Cutter button ................................................................ B-14
Thread density key .................................................................... S-88
Thread guide ........................................... B-12, B-41, B-44, B-53
Thread guide plate ............................................. B-12, B-44, B-48
Thread marks ............................................................................ E-76
Thread palette key .............................................. E-66, E-67, E-72
Top cover ................................................................................ B-12
Top stitching ............................................................................. S-50
Touch pen ...................................................................... E-67, A-6
Trial key .................................................................................... E-19
Troubleshooting ......................................................................... A-7
Twin needle ............................................................................. B-52
U
Uninterrupted embroidering (Monochrome) ............................. E-43
Upgrading ................................................................................ A-22
Upper threading
twin needle mode ................................................................ B-52
using the “Automatic Threading” button .............................. B-48
A-26
English
882-C41
Printed in Taiwan
XF3648-001

Baby Lock Unity BLTY Sewing Machine Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Baby Lock Unity BLTY Sewing Machine Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Baby Lock Unity BLTY Sewing Machine Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

SD is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

DANGER - To reduce the risk of electrical shock

WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electrical shock, or injury to

5 Always keep your work area clear:

6 Special care is required when sewing:

7 This machine is not a toy:

8 For a longer service life:

9 For repair or adjustment:

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

declares that the product

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Laser Notices (For U.S.A. only)

IEC 60825-1 Specification

This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser

Laser Notices (For countries except U.S.A.)

Useful Sensor Function - Variety Sensor Function - Automatic

Setting Laser Guideline Marker

Expanding Your Creativity with

Included Embroidery foot with LED pointer

Do you feel like trying a new material, like thin

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE

Chapter 1 Getting Ready Chapter 2 Sensor Functions

Chapter 1 Sewing Basics Chapter 2 Utility Stitches

Chapter 3 Character/Decorative Chapter 4 How to Create Bobbin

Chapter 1 Embroidery Chapter 2 Embroidery Edit

Chapter 3 How to Create Bobbin

Chapter 1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Heirloom.............................................................................. 53 Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer ....................... 8

Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern ....... 66

Chapter3 How to Create Bobbin Work

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

a Connector for the presser foot

Needle and Presser Foot Section

Embroidery Unit Operation Buttons

d “Needle Position” button

e “Thread Cutter” button

f “Presser Foot Lifter” button

g Sewing Speed controller

h “Automatic Threading” button

Using the Flat Bed Attachment

A presser foot storage tray is stored in the accessory

a Storage space of the flat bed attachment

No. Part Name Part Code

Chapter1 Getting Ready .......................................................B-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC......................... 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

Basic operations B-21

Setting Your Machine for the First

a Press to display the time on the screen.

Basic operations B-23

■ Home Page Screen

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page